TW398138B - The program producing and dispatching equipment - Google Patents

Abstract

This invention relates to the program production and dispatch service. It ensures program production and dispatch as well as deliver the necessary information at high speed. This invention's solution consists of multiple subjects composed for program, the program production and dispatch equipment capable of orderly delivering the program based on the program's Cue Sheet the program arrangement timetable section, the subject producing section, the subject dispatching section, and the database linked by network means. By means of the production information and the program arrangement timetable memorized in the database through the network approach, the production information and the program arrangement timetable can be readily transferred at high speed among the dispatching information producing section, the subject producing section, the subject dispatching section and the database.

Description

Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 · * B7 V. Description of Invention (彳) Detailed Description of the Invention Table of Contents The following describes the invention in the order of the table of contents. The technical field to which the invention belongs The problems to be solved by the prior art inventions The means of implementation of the invention (Figures 1 to 96) (1) News program production and delivery device (Figures 1 to 2) ) (1-1) The overall structure of the news program production and delivery device (1-2) Operation (1_3) Other embodiments (2) From the new delivery control for program production (Figures 3 to 10) (2-1 ) Switching and sending of the main control room (2-2) Production of program composition table (2-3) Program creation table (2-4) Action (2-5) Other embodiments (3) Setting of punctual advertisement ( (Figures 11 to 15) (3-1) Setting of advertising start pulse (3-2) Setting of punctual advertisement according to program composition table (3-3) Procedure of setting punctual advertisement Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public dream) ---------) .------ ding ______ -δ A (ίΑ first read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -4- Printed by A7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, _B7 V. Description of Invention (2) (3-4) Action (3-5) Other Examples (4) Confirmation Box (Figure 16) (Fig. 18) (4-1) Setting of the confirmation frame (4-2) Setting procedure of the confirmation frame (4-3) Action (4-4) Other embodiments (5) Input / change of the program composition table (1st (Figure 9 to Figure 2-3) (5-1) Setting of input / change of the item structure table (5-2) Input / change program of the program structure table (5-3) Actions and effects (5-4) Other embodiments (6) Operation mode of constituent units (Fig. 24 to Fig. 32) (6-1) Selection and indication of operation mode of constituent units (6-2) Procedure for determining and releasing constituent time ( 6 — 3) Action (6 — 4) Effect (6 — 5) Other embodiments (7) Start time of the constituent unit (Figure 33 to Figure 37) (7-1) Determination of the start time of the constituent unit And (7-2) the program for determining the time (7-3), the action (7-4), the effect (7-5), other embodiments (¾read the precautions on the back, and then fill out this page) Applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297). -5- Printed by A7 ^ B7 from the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (3) (8) Next (Next) Structure change (Figure 38 to Figure 40) (8 — 1) Order change of structure and display (8 _ 2) sequence change procedure of structure (8-3) Action (8 _ 4) Effect (8— 5) Other embodiments (9) Preview setting (Figure 41 to Figure 46) (9 to 1) Preview setting according to the program table (9-2) Preview setting according to the program composition table (9_3) According to the program Table preview setting program (9-4) According to the program composition table preview setting program (9-5) Actions and effects (9_6) Other embodiments (10) Interview decision table and other screen display (Figure 4-7) ~ Picture 51) (1 0-1) Screen display of interview decision table (1 0-2) Action (1 0-3) Effect (1 0-4) Other embodiments (1 1) Screen display (Figures 5 2 to 5 4) (1 1-1) Screen display of interview schedule (1 1-2) Actions (1 1-3) Effects (1 1-4) Other embodiments of this paper Standards are applicable to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X29 ·? 公 #) (Please read the note f on the back before filling this page) Order-6- Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 * B7 Invention description (4) (1 2) Broadcast original (Figure 55 to 58) (12-1) Production of broadcast original (12_2) Production procedure of broadcast original (12-3) Actions and effects (1 2_4) Other embodiments (13) 0A rule display (Figures 59 to 65) (1 3 — 1) Collection of image data using 0A rule (1 3 — 2) Collection procedure of image data using 0A rule (1 3- 3) Actions and effects (1 3-4) Other embodiments (14) Electric head writing (Fig. 66 to Fig. 75) (1 4 to 1) Structure of the subject matter production management unit (1 4 to 2) News subject matter The composition of the production management department (1 4-3) The recording operation of the broadcasting server management terminal (1 4-4) The recording processing program of the broadcasting server management terminal (1 4-5) The sending operation of the broadcasting server management terminal (1 4-6) The delivery processing program (14_7) of the broadcast server management terminal and the effects and effects (14-8) of other embodiments (14-4-9) of the theme-submit operation of other embodiments (15) the management of the collection of news and film themes ( (Figure 7 to Figure 8 to 7) (1 5 — 1) Collection of news and film subjects (15 — 1 to 1) Collection of broadcast subjects This paper is applicable to China Home Standards (CNS) A4 Specifications (210X297 Male #) ~ (Before you read the notes on the back 4 to fill out this page) A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (5) (15-1-12) Collection of the combination theme (15 — 1 1) Collection of general themes (15-2) Editing of program composition table (15-3) Editing of program schedule (15-4) Actions and effects (15-5) Other embodiments (16) News Custody of film subjects (Figure 88 to Figure 9-6) (16-1) Automatic recording of news and film subjects (1 6 — 2) — Editing of the execution list (1 6 — 3) — New rules for the production of the execution list (16-4) Actions and effects (16-5) Effects of other embodiments of the invention Invention of the technical field to which the invention belongs Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (¾Read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This The invention relates to a device for producing and transmitting a program, and is suitable for a device for producing and transmitting a news program, which is produced by a news report department of a television station, for example. Advanced technology The news programs of television broadcasting are required to quickly and accurately convey various news sources interviewed by television stations, branches, clubs and clubs to viewers. For the production of news programs, the national paper standard (CNS) Λ4 (2 丨 0X297) shall be applied to the paper size scheduled for the interview in the Ministry of Information. -8-Inu A7 * _ B7_ _V. After the description of the invention (6), the news sources interviewed by each branch / branch / club can be quickly edited, and for broadcasting within the time frame of the limited broadcast time, 'the news must be interviewed efficiently source. When the news department produces a news program, for example, editing work is performed for a news source, such as a subtitle or subtitle for subtitles, which will be superimposed on the screen of the video recorded during the interview. The news programs produced in this way are broadcasted in accordance with a program schedule showing the content of the program and the broadcast time of each item constituting the program. The broadcast schedule of the program that was written into the program was also produced by the Department of Public Information based on the broadcast schedule of the TV bureau. Furthermore, in the Ministry of Information, in order to record the subject matter of the broadcast program thus produced as program material or source subject matter, the subject matter is stored and managed using a video recorder (V T R: Video Tape Recorder). Problems to be Solved by the Invention However, in order to produce news programs, the news sources interviewed by the branches / branch offices / clubs were sent to the Ministry of Information through telephone calls or fax transmissions. Similarly, interviews and interviews with reporters from news sources, equipment conditions, etc. are also made using telephone lines. In this case, the information transmission using a telephone line may cause the information necessary for the production and transmission of the program to not be correctly transmitted to the counterparty who must obtain the information, and the efficiency of the production of the program may be reduced. This is external to the deployment of the TV station to produce the program schedule. According to the section {Notes on the back of the page before reading, then fill in this page) The paper size of this edition is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 规 Orange (210X297 公 #) -9 -A7 ____B7 V. Description of the Invention (7) The schedule of the program composition of the schedule, and the deployment of the produced programs in the Department of Public Information are almost completely distinguished from each other, rather than located in the same place. In this case, the preparation of the program schedule between the deployments, the editing of the program composition according to the program schedule, or the granting and receiving of the information when the actual produced program is sent according to the program schedule are based on oral messages. , Phone calls, or hand-written notes. In this case, for example, in the news broadcast by the Department of Public Information, it is necessary to switch the broadcast program immediately when the programming of the program changes due to an emergency interview. However, information such as a message on the collar or hand-written notes will be communicated in the above. In the case of general program production, necessary information cannot be quickly transmitted, or when the information cannot be accurately transmitted to the other party who needs the information, there is a problem that the operation effect during program production and program transmission is reduced. The present invention is made in consideration of the above problems, and the proposal is a program production and delivery device that can reliably and quickly transmit necessary information during program production and transmission. Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the note on the back of the first page and fill out this page) -4.VJI. Means for Solving the Problem The present invention provides a program production and delivery device for solving related problems. A program production and sending device for producing plural themes constituting a program, and simultaneously sending the corresponding themes in accordance with a program schedule (Cue Sheet), is characterized by having: a program for producing the above program schedule information based on program production information Program schedule creation department, and the theme creation department based on the above-mentioned program safety schedule information to produce the above themes, and the basic paper size applies Chinese national standards ((CNS) Λ4 specifications (2) 0X2SH 公 #) ~~~ Economy Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards and Consumers ’Cooperatives ^ A7 · _____B7 'V. Description of the invention (8) The above-mentioned program schedule timetable information is sequentially switched over the above-mentioned themes and the above-mentioned programs are sent out by the theme-delivery department, and the production information is memorized And the database means used for the above program schedule information, and to continue the above program schedule The production department, the above-mentioned theme production department, the above-mentioned theme delivery department, and the above-mentioned database means are network means; by granting production information and program schedule information through the network means, the production information and program schedule information can be confirmed In addition, it is transmitted at high speed between the programming schedule production department, the theme production department, and the theme delivery department and the database means. (Please read the precautions on the back first and then fill in this page 5) The embodiment of the invention is based on the drawings Detailed description of an embodiment of the present invention "(1) News program production and distribution device (1-1) The entire structure of the news program production and distribution device is shown in Fig. 1, and 1 shows the entire news program production and distribution device. The news program production support section 2 in the Ministry of Public Information HB mainly manages the reservation of news topics for the production of news programs or interviews, and the production management section 3 for the production of news topics. It is constituted by a sending machine control section 5 for sending the produced programs to the main control room 4, and sends these news Project production support section 2, news subject production management section 3, sending machine control section 5 and database server (DB server) 7 for news program production and program delivery for storing input data, and For example, Ethernet (Ethernet-The paper size of the book applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210 × 297 公 #} -11)-Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 * _: _____ B7 V. Description of the invention (9 )) And other LAN (Local Area Network) 8 are connected to each other. Outside the Ministry of Information HB, there are branches / branch / club terminals 6 such as branches, branch offices and journalists clubs that are away from the Ministry of Information HB. Made up. The Department of Public Information HB is connected to each other through dedicated lines 13 or public telephone lines 16. In the news department HB of the news program production device 1, the news program production support department 2 produces service schedule input terminals 10 for the schedules of the team members who actually interview on-site, and produces interview schedules and interview team members from the interview plan. An interview management terminal 11 which is designated as so-called interview management information, and a console terminal 18 which inputs information about program production such as a program composition table of a broadcast "program" in the Ministry of Information. News subject production management section 3 is mainly used for editing non-linear editors 2 6 and linear editors 20 for editing the subject matter obtained in actual interviews in a broadcastable form, and for storing the edited news subject matter The presenting server section 22 and the presenting server section 22 for controlling the presenting server section 22 and the presenting server management terminal 25 for managing the presenting server section 22 . The sending machine control unit 5 is a so-called actual program called electronic program schedule, which is called an electronic program schedule, such as a news program item / composition material, which is necessary for the broadcasting of the program sent from the news program production support section 2 and the like. The program composition table is constituted by the output device control terminal 3 1 and the device control unit 32 of the so-called switcher / mixer 30 for controlling non-controlling devices in FIG. 1. In addition, in the delivery machine control section 5 (please note on the back of the first #please fill in this page) The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 gong) -12- The work of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumption cooperative seal ii kl · _____B7 V. Description of the invention (10) The electronic program schedule information produced is displayed on the program schedule terminal 39 connected to LAN8. Furthermore, the news program production and distribution device 1 includes a DB server 7 connected to the LAN 8, and this server contains information such as a program composition table or program data necessary for news program production. Furthermore, the news program production and distribution device 1 connects the broadcast server control unit 9 for controlling the broadcast server unit 2 2 to the LAN 8 with the broadcast server control terminal 9 for the LAN 8 to control. Furthermore, the simplified program production and delivery device 1 is connected to a LAN 8 for a reporter terminal 15 for an interview reporter to produce a manuscript. In other words, the reporter terminal 15 and the branch / branch office / club club terminal 6 are connected to each other by Ding A (terminal adapter: Terminal Adapter) 1 4 through the public telephone line, LAN8 and the branch / branch bureau / club club The terminals 6 are connected to each other by separate routers 12 through a dedicated line 13. Furthermore, the news program production and delivery device 1 is connected to a regional center or other system in a television station through a gateway 40, for example, to produce a CG (computer) for computer graphics for giving special effects to the subject matter used during actual broadcasting. Drawing: Computer Graphic) center. In addition, it is connected to the main control room that manages all programs in the TV station. Furthermore, the news program production and distribution device 1 is connected to the switcher / mixer 30 not only to the broadcasting server section 22 but also to a video recorder VTR 35 or a video camera 38 for sending out emergency materials. In addition, broadcast material is sent by the switcher / mixer 30 for actual broadcast. (Please read the following precautions before filling out this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) Λ4 is present (210X297 public power) -13- Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5 Description of the Invention (U) Next, each configuration in the news program production support unit 2 will be described in detail. First, the service schedule input terminal 10 creates a service schedule based on the service schedule information of a reporter covering a news subject, and the completed service schedule data FW is sent to the DB server 7 via LAN 8. Use this service schedule as the interview schedule for the team members based on the decision. The interview management terminal 11 is composed of the equipment reservation terminal 11A, the interview reservation terminal 11B, and the interview team terminal '1 1 C, as shown in FIG. 2. The equipment reservation terminal 1 1 A reads out the contents of the interview plan sent from each branch / branch office / club terminal 6 and writes it to various equipment used for interviews such as cars or cameras for crew members and equipment. The management information of the scheduled equipment management determines the equipment used in the interview. After confirming the content of the interview management data that is scheduled to be managed from the interview plan, the content of the interview management data is updated according to the content and sent to the DB server 7. The interview planning terminal 11B reads the interview planning data from the contents of the interview plan sent from each branch / branch / club terminal 6 and the like, and decides the interview team member who actually goes to the interview. In response to this decision, the contents of the scheduled interview information of the interview team members assigned to the interview will be updated and sent to the DB server 7. Next, returning to FIG. 1, the console terminal 18 creates a program composition table based on so-called program materials such as the start and end times of the news programs sent from the main control room through the gateway 40. In the news program production and delivery device 1, the final paper size of each client (China) applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) "Regulations (210X297 公 #) (then first read the precautions on the back to fill in this page). Ding. • 14- Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Labor A 7 * ______B7 V. Description of the invention (12) The 'end' uses application software programs for service booking, interview management, program production and other purposes to create service booking files FW, Interview management file FS, program file FD, etc., and send these file data to DB server 7 via LAN 8. Each client terminal is provided with multiple workstations (or personal computers) as the input and output means of data, and each workstation is provided with A keyboard and a mouse (not shown) are used as information input means, and a screen and a printer (not shown) are provided as information output means. Each client terminal uses these information input means and information output means possessed by the workstation. Access to the destination file registered in the DB server 7 "In addition, the DB server that transmits and receives data through the LAN 8 between each client terminal Machine 7 'has a data receiving department, a data transmission platform, and a database. The data content used for the production of the journalistic items stored in the database will be stored in the data receiving department each time the latest data is entered. The content is rewritten and stored as the latest data, and the latest rewritten data is transmitted by the data transmission department and reflected on each client terminal. In fact, the news program production support unit 2 enters the service schedule into the terminal 10 The information of the service schedule of a reporter interviewing a news subject is entered into a designated input field of the service schedule to create a service schedule, the completed service schedule is converted into a file FW, and the service schedule file FW is sent to the DB server 7 through the LAN 8. Use this schedule to determine the interview schedule for the interview team members. In addition, at the news program production support department 2, as shown in Figure 2, the equipment reservation terminal 1 1 A of the interview management terminal 1 reads it from each branch office / branch office / The interview management file sent by the club terminal 6 to the DB servo 7 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X29? Public power) {Count first read back Note on this page, please fill in this page) Rev. 15- Printed by A7 ^ B7 ____ of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (13) The content of the interview schedule written in FS Read and confirm the contents of the interview schedule file that has been written into the management schedule of various equipment used for interviews such as crew members, cars or cameras for carrying equipment, or the assignment of interview crew members (designated by the team members), departure time, etc. Decide the interview schedule. Then update the content of the interview management file FS according to the content of the decision, and send the interview management file FS to the DB server via LAN 8. Then, the interview reservation terminal 11B of the interview management terminal 11 and the interview team terminal 1 1 C, read the interview management file FS sent from the branch office / branch / club terminal 6 to the DB server 7 via LAN8, and confirm the content of the scheduled interview, for example, the next interview written in this interview management file FS from the interview schedule, At the same time, the information of the new interview schedule is changed or added to determine the interview schedule for the next day. After changing the interview management file FS, The interview management file F S is sent to the DB server 7. As shown in Figure 1, each branch / branch / club club terminal 6 side and the Ministry of Information HB side have routers 12 respectively, each router 12 is connected via a dedicated line 1 3, and each branch / branch / club club terminal 6 side The TA 1 4 which is separately provided to the HB side of the Ministry of Information is connected through a public telephone line 16. At the reporter's terminal 15, send the manuscript or interview sent by the branch / branch / club terminal 6 to the DB servo via TA14 on the branch / branch / club terminal 6 side, public telephone line 16, and TA14 on the news department side. Machine 7 sends out. In addition, at the reporter's terminal 15, make original manuscripts, make subtitle overprint reservations, and make subtitle overprint and sound switch materials, etc .: Paper-size it and it depends on home materials (CNS) (21GX297 public power) ~ -16- _________) ___ I__ Ding ___I__-• 9Λ (read the notes on the back first and then fill out this page) Printed by A7, Co-operative Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ _____B7_ V. Description of the Invention (14) Assign the data to DB via LAN8 The servo 7 sends it out, and at the same time, the DB servo 7 reads out the reserved subtitle overprint or the program composition table through the LAN 8 and confirms it. Then, the detailed information on the "item" was originally inputted to the DB server 7 using the program composition table as the original. Further, input and correct the news manuscript at the console (Desk) terminal 18 of the news program production support unit 2 and understand the "theme" from the theme list in the broadcasting server unit 22 read from the DB server 7. And the progress of the interviews and confirmation of interview information from the interview management file FS. Furthermore, at the console terminal 18, the program information C 0 related to the entire broadcasting station transmitted from the main control room 4 is used as the broadcast time of each "composition" of the "program" originally determined by the Ministry of Information HB and The program data C1 such as the broadcast time is converted into a program file FD written in the program composition table, and the program file FD is sent to the DB server 7 through the LAN 8. The program composition table and the like thus produced can be printed out by a printer provided in the console terminal 18 as needed. The one-day news delivered by the news program production and delivery device 1 is composed of a plurality of "programs", and each "program" is sequentially transmitted in the order of the broadcasting times written on the program schedule. In addition, each "program" is composed of a plurality of "items j" corresponding to news content such as economics and politics, and the "project" is composed of, for example, camera images in a studio, VTR (Video Tape Recorder: Video Tape Recorder). Broadcasts and the like are composed of a plurality of "themes" composed of video / audio processed in units of "composition" in the program composition table. (Notes on the back of the first read * Fill in this page) • The paper size of the book is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 male f > -17- Printed by APC, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs · __B7 _V. Description of the invention (15) Furthermore, the console terminal 18 of the news program production support department 2 receives the program data CDO sent from the main control room 4 about the broadcast programs of the entire TV station as a program file via the DB server 7 FD. The program information C0 refers to the program information of the "program" produced in the Ministry of Information HB in the broadcast programs broadcasted by the entire TV station. It is the program ID (Identification) of the identification number for identifying the program, the program name, The program start time, program end time, and broadcast time zone of the program are composed of the program data. At the console terminal 18, the program file C of the program file FD is originally produced on the program composition table to form each "program" information. The "project" information of the "project" is converted into the program file C1 containing the "project" information into a program file FD and sent to the DB server 7 through the LAN 8. The server 7 is to create a program schedule based on the data of the program file FD, and send the program material C 1 of the created program schedule to the sending machine control section 5. The sending machine control section 5 performs The transmission information included in the "composition" of the program material C 1 sequentially digests the "composition" information included in the "item" information and sends it to the main control room 4. Here, based on the actual interview, the "record" The subject matter of "construction" is edited by the video production production management unit 3 by the linear editing machine 20, and is set in the recording and playback machine 21 for taking in and sent to the broadcasting server unit 2 composed of a plurality of hard disks. In addition, the non-linear editing machine 2 6 is used to edit non-linearly the video / sound data of "themes" to be transmitted to the broadcasting server department 2. Here, the server of the news theme production management department 3 controls the paper size applicable to China Standard (CNS) A4 frame (21〇 × 297 " ^ #) One ~~~ -18-_______________ 丁 ______AT —, 1'Λ < " Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed A 7 · B7 V. Invention Description (16) Terminal 2 3 is controlled from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server The terminal 9 receives the program data C1 of the program schedule, and randomly accesses the purpose "theme" contained in the broadcasting server unit 22 under the control of the machine control unit 24 of the program data C1, and then the machine control unit. 24. According to the program data, in the broadcast server unit 22, the random access target audio / video data SV1 of the "subject matter" is sequentially sent to the switcher / mixer 30 of the machine control unit 5. In addition, in the news subject production management section 3, the broadcast server management terminal 25 compares and refers to the subject list of the "program" read by the DB server 7 and the subject list actually stored in the broadcast server section 22, Based on this comparison result, the "subject j" stored in the broadcast server unit 22 is deleted. Furthermore, the news production production management unit 3, after the one-day broadcast ends, from the broadcast server management terminal 25 to the servo control terminal 2 3 Issue a consistent theme management instruction, and the server control terminal 2 3 that received this instruction will, through the machine control section 24, place the singular or A plurality of "themes" are sent to the library 2 8 in a unified manner, and the records are stored in a recording medium such as a video tape. In the sending machine control section 5, sending the machine control terminal 3 1 to the DB server 7 to receive the program data C 1 of the program schedule, the program data C 1 interprets the “composition” of the smallest unit for sequentially executing the program. The switching information is sent to the machine control unit 3 2. Here the machine control section 3 2 for the broadcast server section 2 2 selector / mixer 3 0 commands (read the precautions before reading this page before filling out this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 regulations. (210X 297 at public expense) -19-Printed A7 '__ · _B7 printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (17) Started sending out the "constructed" video / sound data s V 1, and according to the content included in the program The switching information of the data c 1 controls the switcher / mixer 30, thereby controlling the sending timing of the “constituent” video / audio data sent to the main control room 4 by the switching function of the switcher / mixer 30. In addition, at this time, the sound of the anchor or V T R theme is mixed and sent out by the mixer function of the switcher / mixer 30. Here, the team member of the machine control department 5 and the news department team uses the program schedule terminal 3 9 to monitor the program information C 1 ′ of the program schedule sent from the DB server 7 to the terminal, and at the same time, the requested program items For emergency replacement, etc., rewrite the program material C1 of the program schedule. Here, the machine control section 32 is provided with a clock 33 which is synchronized with the reference time of the standard clock in the television station. Based on the clock information output from the clock 33, the "composition" sent from the machine control section 5 is provided. The sending time is sent out in synchronization with the switching time of the main control room 4. In addition, when the composition of the "program" is urgently changed or the "composition" is added during the program broadcast, the sub-input terminal 3 in the sending device control unit 5 edits the program composition table and updates the program information C1 of the program schedule. . In addition, the emergency interview video obtained through the emergency interview is set on the VTR 35, and the "composition" data of the emergency interview video is included in the emergency interview video under the control of the machine control section 32. The SVU passes through the switcher / mixer 3 0 And was sent to the main control room 4. In addition, in the sending machine control section 5, the video data SV 2 of still images and the like produced by the computer graphics editing section (CG editing section) 36 will be --------- 1 J ------ π ------ ^) — {Notes on the back of the page, please fill in this page) This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 gong) -20- Central standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs隼 Bureau *: Printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives A7 · ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (18) It is sent to the switcher / mixer 3 0 through the feeder 3 7 and sent to the master through the switching control of the machine control section 32.控 室 4. In this case, the relevant information such as the subtitle overprinting arrangement or the arrangement of subtitle overprinting is obtained based on the program data C0, C1 according to the program table and the program composition table through the gateway 40. The machine control unit 5 is sent out, and in addition to the cameras 38 used by photographers and others in the studio of the Ministry of Information HB, the machine control unit 32 is also controlled. In this case, the video title S V 3 photographed by the camera 38 is sent to the main control room 4 through the switcher / mixer 30. The main control room 4 is connected to the LAN 8 through the gateway 40, and sends the program data C0 of the program schedule to the DB server 7. The program material other than the news relationship included in the program material C0 here is filtered and removed by the gateway 40. Furthermore, the LAN 8 of the news production and delivery device 1 is also connected to each other through a gateway 40, for example, to LANs with different communication protocols, such as broadcasting stations. (1-2) Operation According to the above configuration, when the news program production and distribution device 1 produces an interview plan for a news source, a member of the news department at the interview management terminal 11 reads out the interview management file FS via LAN7 to confirm that the branch office / The interviews and equipment reservations of the branches, branches, and clubs sent by the branch / club club terminal 6. Furthermore, the team member of the Ministry of Information read out the service schedule file FW to confirm the service schedule of the interview team member. In response to these confirmations, additional interview schedules were entered to determine the interview schedule and the decision was made. Page) The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 公 #) -21-Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives A7 B7 V. Explanation of the invention (19) Scheduled interview scheduled to be written in the interview The management file FS is sent to the DB server 7 through LAN 8. In this way, the members of the Ministry of Information read out the interview management file FS 'service booking file FW at the interview management terminal 11 to confirm the reservation of the interview reporter, interview group member, and equipment, so that the interview reporter, interview group member, and equipment can be confirmed almost real-time. Scheduled interviews. In addition, when producing a program composition table, the team member of the Ministry of Information reads the interview management file F'S from the console terminal 18 of the news program production support department 2 via LAN 8 to confirm the interview information, and simultaneously reads the subject list in the broadcast server section 22. The progress of the "genre" is confirmed, and the program composition table of the Ministry of Information is created based on the program table sent from the main control room 4. In this way, the members of the Department of Information can almost instantly confirm the progress of the interview information and "subject matter" and make a program composition table. Furthermore, the members of the Ministry of Information read out the manuscripts sent by the branch office / branch / club terminal 6 and the reporter terminal 15 via LAN8, and input and proofread the news manuscript so that the necessary information can be obtained reliably and quickly and the news manuscript can be produced. In addition, the interview schedule of the interview reporter or the original manuscript is sent from the branch office / branch office / club club terminal 6 to the DB server 7 via the LAN 8. With the help of the members of the Ministry of Information, the news program production support department 2 can receive the interview schedule or the interview manuscript of the reporters reliably and at high speed. In addition, when the "program" produced by the Ministry of Information HB is actually sent, the "genre" included in the interview is included in the video tape, etc., and the video is edited by the linear editing machine 21 in the news subject production management section 3. The size of this paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 cm) < Precautions for first reading on the back #Fill this page) Order-22- Printed by A7 ^ _B7 of the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ ___B7 V. Description of the invention (20) Enter VTR2 0 for temporary access and send Production and projection server section 2 2. At this time, the program material C1 of the program schedule is received by the server control terminal 2 4 of the news subject production management unit 3 and the DB server 7 through the broadcast server control terminal 9 and based on the program data C1 by the machine control unit. Control and random access to the audio / video data SV 1 of the "subject matter" stored in the presentation server unit 2 2 to the transmission device control unit 5 in order. The program composition table produced in the console terminal 21 is sent to the DB server 7 via the LAN 8. The DB server 7 converts the program data C1 of the program schedule to the news subject production management section 3 via the LAN 8. The server controls the terminal .2 3, so that the program materials of the program schedule can be sent to the news production management department 3 reliably and at high speed. At the same time, the sending machine control section 5 receives the program data C1 of the program schedule from the DB server 7 through the LAN 8 through the sending machine control terminal 31. Next, the machine control unit 5 is sent out, and the "construction" of the "program" is sent to the main control room 4 by the machine control unit 33 to switch and control the switcher / mixer 30 according to the program data C1 of the schedule schedule. In this way, the program composition table to which the “item” information and the “composition” information are added and produced on the console terminal 21 is converted into the program data C 1 of the program schedule by the DB server 7 and sent to the LAN 8 through News subject production management section 3 and sending machine control section 5 'In this way, the news' subject production management section 3 and sending machine control section 5 can confirm that this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 cm) (for Please read the notes on the back first and fill in this page)-* -23- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention Description (21) Programs with high-speed awards and sharing separate schedules Information C 1. The news production production management unit 3 and the sending machine control unit 5 can reliably and quickly receive the program information of the program schedule C 1. Prevent confusion of the operation, and at the same time can send the produced "program j with excellent efficiency" According to the above configuration, by transmitting and receiving information between the DB server 7 and each client terminal through the LAN 8, all the client terminals in the Ministry of Information HB can reliably and quickly receive the information produced by each client terminal. This can improve the work efficiency when producing a news program, that is, when the production program is sent to the main control room 4. In addition, according to the above embodiment, the news set at a distance from the television station is used by using a dedicated line 13 or a public telephone line 16 Branches / branches of remote TV stations or branches / branches / clubs composed of clubs are connected to the LAN 8 of the news program production and sending device 1 and can be obtained from the branches and branches of the TV station's news department HB at high speed. In addition, according to the above-mentioned embodiment, by passing the network of other systems through the gateway 40 or the like The LAN 8 connected to the news program production and delivery device 1 can easily transfer the production information of the subject matter produced by the news program production and delivery device 1 and the transmission information to other systems. (1 to 3) Other embodiments again '', In the above embodiment, the production of news programs in the Ministry of Information was explained. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 cm). Ding __.__ 令, j — * τ < {Notes on the back of the first reading, and then fill out this page) -24-Printed by A7 B7 of the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (22) and send the production program to the main control room 4 However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may also be applied to a case where a production department producing a serial or a special feature sends a produced program. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the same effects as in the above-mentioned embodiment. In addition, in the embodiment described above, the service reservation terminal 10 of the news program production support unit 2 refers to the service reservation file FW, refers to the interview management terminal 11 and creates the interview management file FS, and also refers to the console terminal 18, The case where the program composition file FD is produced will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Each service reservation file FW,. Interview management file FS, and program composition file FD are respectively on the service reservation terminal 1 0, the interview management terminal 11 or Any terminal of the console terminal 18 can be referred to and produced. Furthermore, if software for producing each file is available, it can be read from the DB server 7 through all terminals connected to the LAN 8 including the reporter terminal 15 Refer to and create a destination file. In this way, the members of the Department of Public Information can refer to and produce various files from any terminal in the news program production and distribution device 1. The members of the Department of Public Information can freely move without restrictions on the work place to perform news program production and program delivery. operation. In addition, in the above embodiment, the case where the broadcasting server unit 22 is constituted by a plurality of hard disks is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a DVD (Digital Versatile Disc) is used. It is also possible to use a recording medium or a semiconductor memory, but it is important that the storage medium is a memory medium that can be accessed at random. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public power) is applied to the paper size of the news program for production and delivery. (Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)-Order- -/ 1 -25- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7: .__ B7 V. Description of the Invention (23) Set to 1 connected by a bus-type LAN8 formed by Ethernet. The occasion is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the news program production and sending device can also be connected to a star or ring network. (2) From a new transmission for program production Control (Fig. 3 to Fig. 10) (2 — 1) Switching of the main control room and sending out the main control room 4 as shown in Fig. 3 When producing each "item" constituting the "program", it is produced from other programs The sending signals of each "item j" of the "programs" provided by the ministry are switched according to the broadcasting schedule. The main control room 4 is in addition to the news department 新闻 B, which produces news programs in television stations. Production of special features, etc. 51 1. Accumulated advertisements (CM ) The CM library 5 2 of the subject matter, the program library 5 3 which stores various program subjects, or the transmission line of the subject matter information from the series TV station NE T are connected. Main control room 4 'News department HB, production department 5 1, The advertisement library 52, the program library 53, and the series of television stations NET each have an internal clock that is aligned with the reference time in the television station. In the case of the Ministry of Public Information HB, the clock 3 3 (Fig. 1) is used as the internal reference clock. The main control room 4 will provide "programs" provided by the Ministry of Information HB, Production Department 51, Advertising Library 5, 2, Program Library 53, and series TV stations NET, etc., or advertisements according to the TV station's 1-day broadcasting schedule. Synchronize with the reference time based on the local reference clock. Switch to the local station

The size of this paper is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210x29h > i " T (for the precautions on the back, please fill out this page). ♦ '-26- Printed by Aigong Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ _____B7 V. Description of the invention (24) LQCAL or a series of TV stations NET will broadcast it. At the news program production support department 2 as shown in Figure 1, read from the console terminal 18 from the main control room 4 through the LAN. 8 The program file C0 file and program composition file FD sent to the DB server 7 display the program material C recorded in the program composition file FD as the program table or program composition table data on the editing screen. In the console terminal 18, select the program / data C0 of the designated program in the program table, and for the program material C0, create program material C1 by setting the program composition table setting items, composition, and timing of sending advertisements, etc. The data C1 is converted into a program composition table FD and registered in the DB server 7. The program data C 1 thus registered in the DB server 7 is controlled by the sending device of the sending device control unit 5. When it is read at the terminal 31, it is converted into program schedule data. Based on the program material C1 produced by the console terminal 18 in the Ministry of Information, the information on each of the "programs" constituting the production is recorded. The program schedule schedule data of the "item" delivery sequence sends each "item" to the main control room 4. As shown in Fig. 4, the Ministry of Information HB sends each "item" of the "program j" to the main control room 4. In the case, the team member of the Ministry of Information monitors the delivery status of each "item" on the console (not shown), and at the same time presses the select button (TAKE button) of the starter 55 at the designated timing to switch the composition of each "item". By pressing the input TAKE button at a specified timing to switch the "composition", the starter 5 5 is sent to the feeder (" read the precautions on the back-" fill out this page)

This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297gong) -27- A7 B7 Printed by the Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of the invention (25) The controller control unit 3 sends a pulsed Control signal SC 1. The machine control section 3 2 receives the timing start signal of the control signal SC 1 based on the program schedule data. In response to the timing start signal, the broadcast server section 2 2 and the camera 3 8 Each of the sending devices such as the switcher / mixer 30 sends a control signal SC 2. As a result, according to the control signal SC2, the broadcast server section 22 and the camera 38 sequentially send the switcher / mixer 3 0 corresponding to each configuration " "Program" theme information, video theme SV1, SV3. Switcher / mixer 3 0, after the video theme SV1, SV3 mixes sound information, each theme information is sent to the main control room 4 by switching control, so that Programs are performed sequentially> At this time, on the monitoring screen of the program schedule schedule terminal 39 set in the sending machine control section 5, the item data of the program schedule is displayed from the top to the bottom in the delivery order. For example, if the item data "On Time Advertisement 1" in the top column is sent, the display of "On Time Advertisement 1" disappears from the screen by reverse scrolling, and the following items of "On Time Advertisement 2" and "Confirmation Advertisement 1" continue. (2-2) Creation of the program composition table The program composition table is created on the console terminal 18 of the news program production support section 2 using the application software for program composition table creation. That is, the application software for creating the program composition table 'reads the program composition file FD registered in the DB server 7 first' as the program table or program composition of the program composition file FD of the program composition file FD. (Please read the notes on the back first and then add 4 pages to this page)-, π This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 public dream) -28 · Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives ^ A7 * ___ B7 V. Description of the invention (26) The table data is displayed on the screen and is made by inputting / changing the data. The program table 60 shown in Fig. 5 is displayed on the screen for editing 6 0A, with display Shows the program name column 6 of the program name, shows the program start time column 6 of the program start time, shows the program end time column of the program end time 6 3 'shows the show time of the program, and the show time column 64. In addition to the program name A column next to column 61 is provided with a program number column 65 ("No.") in which a program number is assigned in accordance with the broadcasting order of each "program" corresponding to each program name. Further, in the program table 60, There is an operation mode column 6 showing the operation mode of the "program" 6. A control column 6 showing the name of the person in charge of the "program" 6 7. The area / network showing the information about the switching target when sending to the local LOCAL or network NET Road column 6 8. "Status" column 6 showing whether it has been broadcast. 9, CG column 70 showing information about computer graphics. "Program message" column 71 showing information about ending messages. When the program composition table creation application software displays the program table 60 on the screen, the display section 60 B on the upper side of the program table 60 displays the system program table and the broadcast date of the program. Further, various setting buttons such as a login button, an input button, a program start button, a program end button, and a preview button are provided as the setting buttons 72 under the display section 60B. In addition, on the editing screen 6 which is displayed together with the program table 60, A is provided with a menu bar 8 0A for selecting a display menu, file, editing, display, start / end or preview, and for selecting a schedule. Display schedule button 8 for display 1. Select the scheduled schedule button 8 for the scheduled interview schedule 2. Select the interview schedule table for the paper size. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297) Public ^ " " 5 '(" 圪 Please read the notes on the back of the feed and then fill out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 · ______ B7 V. Invention Description (27) Interview Group Member Button 8 3. Manuscript button for displaying the original creation screen for selection 7 4. Program production button for displaying the program list 8 5 'Search button for searching interview items using keywords 8 6. Broadcasting for pre-registration several times The program registration button 8 for the programs used in the program, and the pre-setting button 88 for setting the pattern and the like beforehand. Further, a cut-out for deleting input data is provided at the bottom of the screen 6 〇 A. Button, copy button for copying input data, Undo button for returning to the previous process, registration button for registering input data as function key button corresponding to editing function 9 0, At the same time, there is a message bar 92 for displaying error messages, etc. At the console terminal 18, after selecting "program" through the program table 60, the program data C 0 of the selected "program" is displayed on the program composition table 9 5 Display data, use the program composition table 80. Set "items" and "composition" for "program". The part corresponding to Figure 5 is displayed using the same symbol. In Figure 6, the program composition table 9 5 is displayed together On the editing screen 9 5 A, there is an item name column 9 that displays the name of each item of the "program", and an item number column 9 7 ("No.") that displays the item number corresponding to each item name. The "start time / time" column of the "project" start time and the project time 9 8. The composition time column 9 9 showing the broadcast time of the composition (hereinafter, simply referred to as the composition time) displays the type of the image of the "composition" as "Construction" display area such as the image column 100. Furthermore, the program composition table 95 is provided with a "Key" column 101 for displaying keyword information, an effect column 102 for displaying off, and information for special effects. 、 Show the sound (Please read this first. Please note the back to fill in this page) The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X29 * 7mm) • 30-Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Industrial and consumer cooperatives print together A7. B7___ V. Sound column 1 of the information of the invention description (28) 3, M IX column 1 0 showing information about the mixing of sounds, 0 0 Subtitle overprint column showing information about subtitle overlay 1 0 5 and so on. That is, the start time and time of each item set in the "start time / time" column 98 are automatically set by the start time and composition time of the previous item. In addition, the right side of the program composition 95 is provided with a determination time notification column 1 0 6 for determining the start time of the composition corresponding to the display range of the items of the program composition table 105. In addition, the application software of the program composition table is When the program composition table 9 5 is displayed, the display unit 9 5 Β on the upper side of the program composition table 95 displays the program composition table, and displays the program name, the broadcast date of the program, the running mode, the program delivery object, and editing. Residual time in the OK box. Furthermore, a setting button 1 0 7 for editing is provided in the lower column of the display section 9 5 Β, for example, a registration button for registering a set item for a program, a print button for printing a display screen, and a display interview Interview item button for project, no preparation button for setting item to "none", general pattern button for setting general pattern, NV button for setting NV theme, list of display theme The theme list button for setting, the item group button for setting the item group, the setting button for setting the item, the setting button for the advertisement start pulse, and the "setting" for setting the composition time. Buffer "button, etc. In addition, the editing screen 9 5Α ′ displayed together with the program composition table 9 5 is provided with a menu bar for selection menu, file, editing, project / genre, special designation, preview or preview function 8 Ο Β, and at the same time IIII ^ I qi less — ， -'β ·. (Notes on the back of the 诮 first read this page before filling out this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specifications (210X297 public power) -31- Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 * ___B7 V. Description of Invention (29) Same as the program table 60, with a service table selection button 81 for selecting and displaying the service table. Interview schedule button 8 for schedule list 2. Interview team button 8 for selection of interview group list for display 8 3. Selection of original button for display of original production screen 8 4. Program production button for display of schedule 8 5. A search button for searching for interview items using keywords 8 6. A program registration button for registering programs that have been aired multiple times in advance 8 7. Pre-setting of patterns and so on Set button 88 and so on. In the lowermost column of the screen 9 5 A displayed together with the program composition table, a function button 1 0 8 for setting a function for editing the program composition table 95 is used together with the program table 60. The displayed screen 6 〇 A is similarly provided with a delete button for deleting input data, a copy button for copying input data, a restore button for returning to the previous process, and registration input data A registration button and a message column 91 are provided, and buttons for inserting and adding "items" or "compositions", and buttons for inserting and adding NV (news video) themes are provided. This is at the console terminal 18, and when the "item" and "composition" are set in the program composition table 95, select the "program" in the program table .80 for editing purpose, and read it as shown in Fig. 7 The program composition table 9 5 is displayed. In the setting button 10 7, by touching the interview item button 1 0 7A for displaying the interview items, the interview item highlight menu 1 1 0 and the composition pattern highlight menu 1 1 are displayed. 1. Here, for example, if the item "2. Mom's Spring" is created between the item "2. Headline 2" and the item "3. Advertising program arrangement video clip", the interview item is selected first (for the first read, please read the back Note 4 fill out this page) The size of the paper used for this edition is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X2Q7). -32- Employees' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Inu A7. B7 _ V. Description of the invention (30) highlights The interview item of the style menu "1. Spring of Mom Ranch" 11〇A. In this case, when you touch the "Mom's Ranch Spring" line, the line changes color so that the selected line can be distinguished from other lines. With this, 'About the program', you can enter information about each "item" produced by the Ministry of Information Η B. Secondly, highlight the menu 1 1 1 by constituting a pattern. For example, select "3 • Camera + Ν V (News Video)" 111Α . In this case, the "3. Camera + NV." Line of 1 1 1Α is different from the other lines in the visual soil after changing the color. Here, if the item "2. Headline 2" 11 2Α of the program composition table 9 5 is selected, "as shown in Fig. 8", the item "1. Spring of the mother's ranch" 1 1 2 B is entered in the program composition table 9 5 Make up. In this case, the item "3. Advertising Program Arrangement Video Segment" 1 1 2C, which is the next item of the item "2. Headline 2" 1 12A, becomes "4. Advertising Program Arrangement Video Segment" 11 2D. In this way, in the console terminal 18, the application software for creating the program composition table is used to set "item" and "composition" in the program composition table 95, so that the program data C 0 can be added with "item" information and "composition" information. The program material C 1 »program material C 1 is registered in the DB server 7 which is converted into a program configuration file FD. This is at the sending machine control section 5, and the DB server 7 reads the program schedule information converted from the program information C1 through the LAN 8 to the program schedule terminal 39, and uses the program schedule and screen data as the original Using the application software for program schedule display, create the program schedule screen 1 1 5 as shown in Figure 9, and apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (2ΙΟχ297 public power) to this paper size (for Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) Order ^) /--33- A7 B7 Printed by the Central Laboratories of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, V. Invention Description (31) Program security schedule screen 115 is displayed according to the program The content of the program schedule data such as the item name of the data C1 and the start time and end time of the "item", the composition time, and the start time and end time of the advertising item. (2-3) The program for creating the program composition table is in the news program production and distribution device 1. The program composition table of the news program is based on the program data C 0 sent from the main control room 4 according to the program composition shown in FIG. 10. Table making program to make. First, in step SP1, the initial setting of the reception status is set by the application software for repeated determination of the reception data included in the earphone 40. Secondly, at step SP2, the gateway 40 repeatedly executes the receiving process of the program data C0 of the program schedule until it receives the program data C0 sent from the main control room 4. If the gateway 40 receives the program data C 0, it moves to the next step SP 3 and compares the broadcast time of the program with the received program data C 0 and the broadcast time of the program that has been registered in the DB server 7 to determine. Whether the broadcast should be child-fighting. Here, the gateway 40, if it is determined that the program broadcast time of the program material C 0 received later overlaps with the broadcast time of the program already registered in the DB server 7, the processing moves to step s P 4. When the broadcast time of the received program material C 0 and the broadcast time of the program already registered in the DB server 7 are repeated, the console terminal 18 is notified by a light or a buzzer (alarm). Furthermore, the main control room 4 was notified of abnormal conditions by a signal or buzzer, etc., and then returned (诮 Read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-Order · This paper size applies Chinese national standard ( CNS) Λ4 is present (210X297 public dream) -34- A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (32) Step s P 2. In this way, an error message is notified by a signal or a buzzer, that is, even when the console terminal 18 does not perform a monitoring operation, a member of the news department can also detect the duplication of the broadcast time when the program material C 0 is registered. error. In addition, if the gateway 40 is in step SP3, when it is determined that the broadcast time of the received program data C0 and the program already registered in the dB server 7 does not overlap, the process moves to step SP5, and If the error display was previously displayed, after eliminating the error display, go to the next step SP6. In step SP 6, the gateway 40 determines whether the latest received program data C 〇 and the received program data C 〇 which have been registered in the DB server 7 are duplicated by comparing the IDs. If the received section 100 data C 〇 overlaps with the received program data C 〇, the processing of the gateway 40 is moved to step s P 7, and the gateway will receive the latest program received. The data C0 is overwritten with the received program data C0. In addition, in step SP6, when it is determined that the latest program data C0 is the unreceived program data, in the next step SP8, a new program is automatically produced based on the latest program data C0. At step SP9, the gateway 40 uses the overwritten program or newly produced program data C0 as the original program configuration file F D to register in the database in the D B server 7. In this way, after the registration of the program composition file FD with the program data C 0 is ended, the processing program of the program composition table uses the screen data as a basis to form the picture of the program composition table, and the program data C 0 in the program table as (Read the back notes before filling in this page)

This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X297). 35 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. . (2-4) The operations and effects are as described above. When the news program production and distribution device 1 receives the program data sent from the main control room 4 and creates a program composition table to register the news program, the news production distribution device 1 If the program data C 0 sent from the main control room 4 is received by the gateway 40, the broadcast time of the received program data C 0 is compared with the program data C 0 which has been registered in the DB server 7 to determine the broadcast time. Whether their respective broadcast times are repeated. If the broadcast time of the received program material C 0 is repeated here, an error display is issued, and the program data is returned to the receiving state again, and the new program data C 0 is received. In this way, it is possible to prevent the broadcasting time of the programs registered in the schedule list 80 from being repeated in the simple way. In addition, when the gateway 40 determines that the broadcast time of the received program material C 0 is not repeated, it also compares the newly received program data C 0 with the program ID of the program that has been registered in the DB server 7. repeat. If the program data is duplicated here, the latest received program data will be overwritten with the already received program data. In addition, when the program data c 0 is not repeated, a new program is automatically created based on the latest program data c 0 received, and the program data C 0 of the new program is registered in the program configuration file FD in the DB server 7. In this way, the gateway 40 compares the program data C 0 sent from the main control room 4 with the program data that has been registered in the program configuration file FD. After determining the program resource, it is expected that C 0 is not duplicated, and a new program is created and registered in Program structure (Notes on the back of the first reading are filled in on this page) The paper size of the edition is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public power) -36- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (34) The file FD is used to prevent the program material from being repeatedly registered when the program is composed. As shown in Fig. 5, on the program table 60, a program name, a program start time, a program end time, a broadcast time, and the like are displayed. Here, the team member of the news department moves the cursor instruction to the program name field in the program table 60 by the mouse at the console terminal 18 of the news program production support department 2. The program name field of the "program" in the "item 1" should be set in 61 6 1 is specified, and the program composition table 9 5 (FIG. 6) of the destination “program” is displayed by touching. Furthermore, the team member of the Ministry of Information set the position indicated by the cursor on the program composition table 9 5 by using the mouse to set the target "item" name displayed in the item name column 86 using input means such as a keyboard, and displayed at "start time / Input information such as the item start time of the "time" column 98, the composition time displayed in the composition time column 99, and the type of the image displayed in the image column 100. In this way, for each "program" information, the "project" information and the "composition" information can be determined. The members of the Ministry of Information will send the materials of the program composition table 95 (program material C 1) thus determined from the console terminal 18 to the eight DV servers 7 and register them in the program composition file FD. On the other hand, in the sending machine control section 5, the DB server 7 reads out the program data C1 of the program composition file FD produced by the console terminal 17 through the LAN 7 on the screen of the program schedule terminal 39. Program composition table 9 5. In this way, the program configuration file F D can be confirmed and received at a high speed by receiving and receiving the program configuration file F D through LA 8. Where the "program" and "project" are actually shown here in the main control room 4. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297).

-37 A7 ^ ____B7 V. Description of the Invention (35), the members of the Ministry of Information who monitor the delivery status will follow the program information C1 of the schedule schedule to send the pulsed control signal SC 1 from the starter 5 at the specified program sending timing The delivery is sent to the machine control section 32 of the machine control section 5. The machine control section 32 sends a control signal S C 2 to the broadcast server section 2 2 or the camera 3 8 based on the timing starter of the program data C 1 according to the control signal S C 1. In this way, the machine control section 3 2 sequentially sends the subject matter of the programs in accordance with the order of the “items” of the “programs” in the time schedule arranged by the program data C 1. Further, the machine control section 32 switches the control of the subject matter sent by the control signal S C 2 sent from the switcher / mixer 30, thereby sequentially transmitting the subject matter of the program from the news department HB to the main control room 4. By sending the program materials from the Ministry of Information to the main control room 4 in accordance with the program materials according to the program schedule, the programs can be surely sent. The Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives printed on the screen at the terminal 39 of the program schedule at this time, the project information is displayed in the order of submission from top to bottom. If the top item is sent, the top item The data disappears from the screen by reverse scrolling, and the following items are sequentially reversely scrolled and displayed on the screen. In this way, it is possible to accurately grasp the sending status of the program at the terminal list of the program schedule. According to the above configuration, by connecting the Department of Public Information HB and the main control room 4 through the gateway 40 through the LAN 8, the program data is transmitted and received through the LAN 8. This allows the program data to be received and received at high speed. Registering it can improve the efficiency when producing programs. In addition, according to the above-mentioned embodiment, the paper size of the program registered in the DB server 7 is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 丨 0X297). -38- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. A7 · _ _B7 V. Description of the invention (36) The repetition of the show time of the program in which the data is written and the repetition of the program content and the program data C 〇 which has been registered in the D Β server 7 are determined by the comparison of the gateway 40. In this way, the program materials granted between the Ministry of Information ΗΒ and the main control room 4 can prevent repeated registration on the program table, thereby preventing the wrong entry of the program table beforehand and improving the production efficiency of the program table. In addition, in the main control room 4, the information related to the advertising items set in the program data C 0 is basically used by the application software in the program composition table production room, and the information of the CM items is displayed on the automatically produced program composition table. The program composition is automatically produced. Tables, such as this, can further improve the efficiency of the program composition table. Therefore, if there is an emergency change of the CM project factory amount in the main control room 4, the content of the change can also be reflected in the program composition table, which can prevent the occurrence of a broadcasting accident before it happens. (2-5) The other embodiments are the same as those in the above embodiment. Although the description is made for the case where the Ministry of Information Η B produces a news program and sends the produced program to the main control room 4, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can also be applied to the case where the program produced by the production unit 51 is sent to the main control room 4. Thereby, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the gateway 40 determines that the program data transferred from the main control room 4 to the news program production and delivery device 1 is duplicated, the present invention is not limited to this. The application software for duplicate detection can also detect duplicates of the transferred data on the D Β server 7 _________) ______ 丁 ______ qi-9 ». (Please fill in this page for the precautions on the back) The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 ^^ 7 -39- Printed by A7 ^ B7 of the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Standard Vehicle Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (37) (3) The setting of punctual advertising (section 1 1 ~ 15) (3 _ 1) When the setting of the advertising start pulse is to implement the “composition” of the smallest unit of the program based on the program schedule data in sequence, send it to the machine control section 5 as shown in section 4 As shown in the figure, from the starter 5 5 "take" timing (TAKE) switching (control signal SCI) is set to the timing of the signal set in the program schedule data synchronized with the time output by the clock 3 3 CLK is sent out. This is in the program In the case of the advertisement CM, the news department HB sets the output timing of the advertisement start pulse for the program material C 1 on the console terminal 1 8 of the sending-out machine control unit 5. Thus, the program material C 1 of the output timing of the advertisement start pulse is set. The program composition file FD is converted and registered in the DB server 7. This allows the sending device control unit 5 to read out the program data C1 registered in the DB server 7 from the sending device control terminal 31, and can be set in The output timing of the advertisement start pulse of the program material C 1 is automatically sent to the main control room 4 by the advertisement start pulse. In this case, when the main control room 4 receives the advertisement start pulse sent by the machine control section 32, The advertisement delivery device 56 is activated, and thereafter, the switcher of the main control room 4 is switched from the Ministry of Information HB to the advertisement after a specified time has passed from the start of the advertisement program set in the program material C1 until the advertisement program is delivered. The sending device 56 is used instead of the news program to broadcast the advertisement. (3 —) According to the setting of the punctual advertisement according to the program composition table (please read the precautions on the reverse side before filling in this ) The paper size of the edition applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 × 297 male • 40- Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (38) As shown in Figure 11 For the designated on-time advertisement to set the timing of the advertisement start pulse CM — Q, in the program composition table 95, first enter the previous composition constituted by the intended "Juntang advertisement" with a touch input. That is, in this implementation In the case of an example, the purpose of setting the purpose of punctual advertising in the item name column 9 6 is "Just-in-time advertising" 9 7A. The former component constitutes the "advertising program arrangement film segment" 9 7 B. In the “Band” item 9 7B, the “1 j” part of the time column 9 9 is entered by pointing with a mouse pointer. In this way, the background color of the text constituting the time column 9 9 in the “Advertising Program Video Segments” becomes different from the background color of other constitutions, such as local red (shown in slanted lines in the figure). The program schedule video segment "9 7 B Where you want to set the timing of the on-time advertisement from this point on, the operator can recognize it visually. Next, by touching the CM-Q instruction button 107B provided in the program composition table 96, as shown in FIG. 12, the CM-Q highlight menu 1 2 0 is displayed on the program composition table 95 »Here, in the CM- In the Q highlight menu 1 2 0, the operator selects each time setting button of "-3 seconds", "-2 seconds", "-1 seconds", and "0 seconds" that are not prominent 1 2 1A ~ 1 2 Any one of the 1D buttons specifies the timing of the advertisement start pulse C M-Q from the Ministry of Information Η B to the main control room 4 as 3 seconds before, 2 seconds before, and 1 second before the on-time advertisement. Before or 0 seconds ago. Thereafter, set the timing of the transmission β by touching the designated button 1 2 2 In this case, as shown in Figure 13 on the program composition table 9 5, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 is applied to the paper size of the composition Specifications (210X297): ----------} ______ 丁 ______ 气} i (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) -41-Shellfish Consumption of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative prints A7 B7 Five 'invention description (39) The time column 9 9 B is formed above the composition time, for example, when the advertisement start pulse CM — Q is issued 3 seconds before the end time of the composition, “一 3 Q j, thereby confirming that the timing of the advertisement start pulse CM-Q of the on-time advertisement is confirmed in the program composition table 95, and is set 3 seconds before the end of 9 7 B which constitutes "advertising program arrangement movie. fragment". In this way, the sending timing of the advertisement start pulse CM_Q is set in the program composition table 95. After the program data C1, the program data C1 is converted into a program composition file FD and registered on the DB server 7 via LAN8. When the HB sends an advertisement start pulse to the main control room 4, the sending machine control unit 5 reads out the program configuration file FD from the DB server 7 by sending out the machine control terminal 31 to be registered in the program configuration file FD. The timing information of each component, the timing information of the advertisement start pulse CM-Q, and the timing information transmitted from the clock 3 3 are based on the timing of the signal before the designated time for entering the punctual advertisement from the machine control unit 3 2 Send the advertising start pulse CM-Q to the main control room 4 and send it to the main control room 4. From the machine control section 3 2 and receive this advertising start pulse CM-Q, start the advertising delivery machine 5 6 inside the main control room. Thereafter, after a specified time set by the time setting buttons 121A to 121D has elapsed, the switcher (not shown) of the main control room 4 is switched from the Ministry of Information HB to the advertisement delivery machine 56. As a result, from the main control room 4, the composition of the news program is switched to the composition of the advertisement and broadcasted. 3-3) Setting procedure of punctual advertisement

This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 坭 Orange (210x29h > H (read the notes on the back before filling out this page) --a Γ • 42-Institute for Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Government Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 · __ _B7 ___ V. Explanation of the invention (40) The setting of the advertisement start pulse of the purpose punctual advertisement is implemented in the console terminal 18 in the manner shown in FIG. 14 in accordance with the procedure of punctual advertisement setting. The program, first at step SP 1 0, after reading the program composition file FD from the console terminal 18 by the DB server 7 and performing initial setting, then at step SP 1 1 use the program material of the program composition file FD. The program composition table 9 5 is displayed on the screen of the console terminal 18 (FIG. 6). Here, at the next step SP 1 2 if the program composition table 9 5 is instructed to end, the console terminal 18 is terminated. Procedure for setting punctual advertisement. In addition, in step SP 1 2, if it is determined that the start pulse has not been set for the punctual advertisement for the purpose, the processing of the console terminal 18 is moved to step SP 1 3, and the judgment of CM-Q is determined. Determine whether the button 1 07B is pressed. In this case, the program configuration table 107 5 CM-Q designation button 107B until it is pressed by the operator, during which the processing of steps SP12 and SP13 is repeated. When the CM-Q designation button When 1 0 7 B is pressed, the processing of the console terminal 18 moves to step SP 1 4. Here, in step SP 1 4, it is determined that the advertisement start pulse CM-Q is designated as the button 1 0 7B ( In Figure 11 below, the composition of the "Advertising Program Arrangement Film" 9 7 B) is the composition of "On Time Advertising" 9 7A »The composition of the advertising start pulse CM-Q specified here is not on time advertising For the occasions, move to the step This paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards (CNS> A4 now (210X297)) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) -line}.! -43-Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives A7 'B7 V. Description of the invention (41) s P 1 5 Display the error message "Advertising start pulse cannot be specified" in the message block 9 5 of the program composition table 9 2 (Figure 6) and return to Step SP 1 2. In addition, it constitutes "Advertising Program Arrangement Video "Segment" 9 7 B. If it is a punctual advertisement, move to the next step SP 1 6 'After the error message is displayed in step SP 1 5 and the error message is eliminated' in the next step SP 1 7 On the program composition table 95, the CM-Q highlighting menu 120 is superimposed and displayed (Fig. 12). Next, the processing of the console terminal 18 is determined in step SP 1 8CM-Q and highlighting the style menu 1 2 0. Is the designated button 1 2 2 depressed? Is the advertising start pulse CM-Q specified? If the advertising start pulse CM-Q is specified, the next step S p 1 9 sets the predetermined 値 as the advertising start pulse. The transmission timing is to convert the program data C1 to which the transmission timing is set into a program configuration file FD and register it in the DB server 7. That is, the timing of the advertisement start pulse CM-Q in Fig. 12 is set 3 seconds before the end of the "On Time Advertisement" constitutes 9 7 A. In this way, the timing of the advertisement start pulse specified in step SP 1 8 is registered as the program information C 1 in the DB server 7, and after the next step SP 2 0 closes the CM-Q pop-up menu 1 2 0, it returns The process proceeds to step SP12 and the processes subsequent to step SP12 are performed. In addition, when the sending timing of the advertisement start pulse is not specified in step SP 1 8, the processing of the console terminal 18 moves to step SP 2 1 to determine whether the setting of the advertisement start pulse is performed by the release button 1 2 3 Designation was cancelled. Here, if the setting of the advertising start pulse is canceled, go to step SP 1 9 and the program of which the setting of the advertising start pulse is cancelled. The paper size of this paper applies the Chinese national standard (CNS > AO see the grid (210X297)) First read the notes on the back #Fill this page) A-44- A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (42) The program composition file of Table 9 5 is registered on the DB server 7. In addition, if the setting of the advertising start pulse is not canceled in step SP 2 1, move to step SP 2 2 to determine whether the designation of the advertising start pulse is canceled by the touch input of the cancel button 1 2 4. If the designation is canceled, move to step sp 2 0. After closing CM — Q pop-up menu 1 2 0, return to step spl 2 and continue to execute the processing below step SP12. In addition, the advertising start pulse CM has not been cancelled at step SP 2 2. In the case of a Q designation, move to step SP 2 3 and specify the timing of the advertisement start pulse CM-Q by touching any of the input time setting buttons 1 2 1 A to 1 2 1 D, and then return to Go to step SP 1 8 The following processing is continued. Here, the timing of the advertisement start pulse CM-Q is “contemporaneous advertising” 9 7 A. The previous one constitutes the “advertising program arrangement movie segment” 9 7 B. The end of the composition example 3 The transmission timings such as seconds ago, 2 seconds ago, 1 second ago, or 0 seconds ago can be set by each time setting button 1 2 1 A to 1 2 1 D. As described in step SP 1 9 for the purpose configuration " "On-time advertising" 9 7 A If the designation, cancellation or cancellation of the advertising start pulse CM-Q is set, the program data C1 into which the advertising start pulse's sending timing is written is converted into the program configuration file FD and registered on the DB server 7 This ends the setting procedure of the advertising start pulse. (3-; 4) Actions and effects (read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS > 8 4 cells (210X297)蝥) -45- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (43) The above structure is written in the news program production and delivery device 1 and written into the program sent from the main control room 4 Composition of table 9 5 When the timing is uncertain and the timing of advertising start pulses is set for the on-time advertisements necessary for broadcast transmission, the DB server is used as the application software for creating the program composition table at the console terminal 18 of the news program production support department 2. 7 Read out the program information C1, and display the program composition table 9 on the screen when the program information C1 is displayed. 5 Display the data, and specify it by the input operation on the screen. Then make the program composition table 9 5 overlap with CM. — Q pop-up menu 1 2 0, with the time setting buttons 1 2 1A ~ 1 2 1D in the CM-Q pop-up menu 1 2 0, after specifying the timing of the advertising start pulse CM-Q, Press the button 1 2 2 to set the timing of the advertisement start pulse. In this way, in the console terminal 18, the program composition file FD read from the DB server 7 is based on the display purpose of the program composition table 95 on the "Just-In-Time Advertisement" 9 7A, which can be confirmed visually and at the same time With easy input operation, the timing of the start pulse CM-Q is surely set as the program material C1 for the punctual advertisement. Furthermore, the program data C1 on which the sending timing of the advertising start pulse is set is registered in the DB server 7 and sent to the machine control section 5 to read the program data C1 from the DB server 7 through the LAN 8 and write the program data in accordance with The timing of the advertisement start pulse of C1 can be automatically sent from the machine control section 32 to the main control room 4 for the purpose of punctual advertisement. The main control room 4 can respond to the advertisement start pulse CM-Q to switch the advertisement out of the machine 5 6 to the punctual advertisement. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CMS) A4 specification (210X297 public dream) --------- 1 ..------ tr ------ J1 (read first. Back Notes for filling in ## 巧 本本 1) -46- Employee Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs print A7 ______B7 ___ V. Invention Description (44) This does not require the operator to rely on the operator to advertise on time. The signaling operation can reduce the burden on the operator and prevent the occurrence of a broadcast accident due to the operator's wrong operation. According to the above configuration, due to the input operation on the program composition table 95 displayed on the screen of the console terminal 18, the timing of the on-time advertisement start pulse CM-Q can be easily used as the program of the program schedule. The setting of the data C 1 can further improve the efficiency of program production and program delivery. In addition, by registering the program data cr with the timing of the start pulse CM-Q of the on-time advertisement set in the DB server 7, the program data C1 can be surely transmitted to the machine control section 5 through the LAN 8. The material C1 can automatically send the advertisement start pulse CM — Q to the main control room 4 from the machine control section 32 of the machine control section 5 according to the program schedule data. By doing this, the operator's operation is omitted when the advertisement start pulse CM -Q is sent, and the advertisement start pulse can be automatically and surely sent to the main control room 4 at the designated sending timing. When the advertisement is sent on time, it can prevent problems due to The operator's wrong operation caused a broadcast accident. In this way, the timing of sending the punctual advertisement is set by the program composition table 95, and the punctual advertisement is surely sent after the completion of the previous composition of the punctual advertisement. Manage the broadcast time of programs and advertisements to make the switching between programs and advertisements smoother and improve the quality of programs. Furthermore, the timing of the start of the advertising start pulse in each punctual advertisement is related to the previous composition of "punctual advertisement", for example, so that it can be set at 3 scales to apply the Chinese national $ quasi (CNS) A4 regulations (210X297 public dream) ~ " • 47-_________) ______ 丁 ______t)!, · (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by A7 * B7 _5, Description of Invention ( 45) The method of specifying the time before seconds, 2 seconds, 1 second, or 0 seconds before, makes it possible to omit the procedure of restricting the advertisement feeder 5 6 for the punctual advertisement to the VTR of the video player. In addition to VTR, it can also respond to M0 (optical drive) disc devices, CD (Compact Disc) devices, etc., which require different settings for the transmission timing. Knowing that various advertisement senders can easily set their respective The timing of the message can omit the advance preparation of the advertisement delivery machine for advertisement delivery. (3-5) Other embodiments are described in the above-mentioned embodiment. Although the timing for setting the start timing of the advertisement start pulse is set to the end time of the immediately preceding structure constituting the "on time advertisement", the present invention is not This is the limit. For example, if a longer time interval is set than the previous configuration of the "Just-In-Time Advertisement", the setting of two or more previous configurations of the "Just-In-Time Advertisement" will be used to send an advertisement start pulse. Timing is also available. In other words, as shown in FIG. 15, for example, when the composition time of 126A, which is the previous composition of “On Time Advertisement”, is 7 seconds, the advertisement is set 9 seconds before the end time of 126A of “composition 2”. When the timing of the start pulse is displayed, "-9Q" is displayed at the position "Construction 1" 126B of the formation time of 45 seconds, and the timing of the advertisement start pulse is displayed 9 seconds before the end time of the formation 2. Has been set. In this way, the control signal S C 1 that enters "Composition 1" 1 2 6 B is sent to the main control room 4 after 43 seconds, and the advertisement start pulse of "2. 6; C" is set. In short, if the size of the punctual advertisement is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 gong) ~. (Notes for previous reading, please fill in this page)-1TB Printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives A7 _B7______ V. If the previous structure of the invention description (46) or the end time of the project is set, by this end time, you can set the sending timing of the advertising start pulse, which can be obtained in the above Example has the same effect. (4) Confirmation box (4-1) The setting of the confirmation box according to the program composition table Here, in the case of the news program production support section 2 'for the setting box or item of the determination box set in the program material C 0' is controlled The station terminal 18 reads the program file FD from the DB server 7 through the LAN 8 by the application software for creating the program configuration table, and displays the indigo data C 1 of the program file FD on the program configuration table 95. The parts corresponding to FIG. 6 are given the same symbols, and in FIG. 16, the application software for creating the program production table has a specified determination item set in the program data C0, and there exists between the determination items. In the case of a confirmation frame, the program configuration table 9 5 is displayed next to the item number 9 7 of the determination frame so that the display range of the item corresponding to the determination frame is displayed in a band-shaped determination frame 1 3 0 »For example, the confirmation box is set with the item" opening "as the determination box" 1 ", the items" item 1 "and" project 2 "as the determination box" 2 ", the item" item 3 "as the determination box" 3 ", and the item "End" is constituted as a confirmation box "4", and the determination of the range where the confirmation box is displayed is displayed to the left of each item number column 9 7 of each confirmation box "1", "2", "3", and "4". Frame with 1 30A ~ 1 30D. Also: That is, each identified frame is 1 3 0A ~ 1 3 0D, which is in accordance with the size of the paper. Chinese National Standard (CMS) 8 4 specifications (210x297 ^ 1--49-(¾ Please read the note on the back first) Please fill in this page for further details.) The book is printed by A7 * B7 printed by the Central Bureau of Standardization of Guangdong Ministry of Industry and Commerce. V. Description of the invention (47) The background color of Table 9 5 is different. This visual display corresponds to The definite frame band 1 3 0A ~ 1 3 0D can be easily identified by the determination item. The colors of each definite frame band 1 30A ~ 1 3 0 D are different, for example, when the background is white The display frames 130A to 130D are displayed in orange, red, blue, green and other display colors, so that each frame "1", "2", "3", and "4" can be easily confirmed visually. Actually, the setting of the confirmation box is set by inputting the start time of the item and the time of the item with the numeric keys in the "start time / time" column 98. For example, in this embodiment, "item 1" is set to 1 8: 0 0 minutes 2 ◦ seconds. The application used here for the production of the program production table Software, the remaining time button of the display part 9 5 B 1 3 1. By touching the "residual time", the determination boxes "1", "2j," 3 "," 3 "displayed in violation of the program composition table 95 are made. The information of "4" will be displayed in the confirmation box with the remaining time in the confirmation box highlighted menu 1 3 2 superimposed on the program composition table 9 5 to be displayed on the screen. That is, the confirmation box highlighted menu 1 3 2 The number of the confirmation frame is displayed in the confirmation frame column 1 3 5 and the remaining time of the determination frame is displayed in the residual time column 1 3 6. For example, when the program shown in the program composition table 95 in FIG. 16 is displayed, the item "OK The remaining time in the confirmation box of a certain box "1" before NET "133A shows that there is no remaining time. In this case, for example, to determine the item displayed in the box belt 1 3 〇 B" This paper scale Langzhongjia (CNS) ΑΊSpecifications (21GX297 public dream) (Please read this page for precautions before filling out this page)

A7B7 Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives. V. Invention Description (48) Project 1 "133B and Project" Project 2 "i33c constitute the confirmation frame" 2 ". The start time of 1 3 3 B is 18:00 0 minutes 20 seconds and the project time of item "Item 1" 133B and item "Item 2" 133C are 3 minutes, so it can be seen that the end time of "Item 2" becomes the time 18 hours 0 6 minutes 20 seconds. In this regard, the entire remaining time of the confirmation and confirmation frame "2" formed between the end of the determination item "determination NET" 133A and the start time of the determination item "determination advertisement" 1 3 3 D is determined by the item " The end time of "OK NET" 133A starts at 18:00:20, and it is 9 minutes and 40 seconds until the start time of the item "OK advertisement" 1 3 3D. 8: 10: 0 0 seconds. The result is displayed on the program. The remaining time of the determination box "2" constituting the current point of Table 9 5 is the remaining time of the entire determination box "2" of 9 minutes and 40 seconds minus the composition time of the confirmation box "2" that has been entered at the current point. 6 minutes becomes 3 minutes and 40 seconds. "In this case, the remaining time column corresponding to the confirmation box" 2 "of the confirmation menu 1 3 2 is displayed, and the remaining time of 3 minutes and 40 seconds is displayed in the corresponding column. In this way, the operator confirms the display data of the confirmation frame column 1 3 5 and the corresponding remaining time column 1 36 displayed in the confirmation frame highlighted menu 1 3 2 and can set the items or composition in the determination frame. Here, when the designated time before the start of the program is reached, the program schedule schedule 1 15 based on the program configuration file F D is displayed at the program schedule schedule terminal 39 as shown in FIG. 9. The schedule of this program is based on the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297 gong)) ~ -01- {Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order -.i Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Shelley Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (49) 1 15 When there is a definite frame in the program, the definite frame band 1 3 0 corresponding to the range of items corresponding to the definite frame and the definite frame band 1 3 0 is displayed with the confirmation box number 1 3 4. (4-2) Setting program of the confirmation frame The item setting of the determination frame of the program composition table is as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, and is set on the console terminal 1 8 of the news program production support unit 2 by the program composition. The application software for table creation is performed in accordance with the setting procedures (1) and (2) of the confirmation box. That is, according to the setting procedure (1) of the determination box of the program composition table 95, first at step SP20, the console terminal 18 reads the program file FD from the DB server 7 by using the application software for program composition table creation. After the initial setting, the program data C1 of the program configuration file FD is displayed on the screen of the console terminal 18 as the data of the program configuration table 95 at step SP21. If it is instructed to end in step SP 2 2 on the program composition table 95 displayed on the screen, the setting procedure (1) of the confirmation frame is immediately ended. In addition, in step SP 2 2, the program composition table 95 is executed. When the instruction is completed, the process proceeds to step SP 2 3 through the console terminal 18 processing. This is at step SP 2 3. First, it is determined in the program composition table 95 whether the start time and end time of the series of television stations are determined. The determined item determination NET or the advertisement whose time is determined is determined. The advertisement is set. . This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS > Λ4 Regulations (210X297)) (Notes for the first reading and 4 pages will be filled out on this page) ^ »! / __ -52 A7, _____B7 V. Description of the invention ( 50) In this step SP 2 3, if the program composition table 9 5 is set to determine the network or the advertisement is determined, proceed to step SP 2 4. In addition, the program composition table 9 5 is not set to determine the network. When the advertisement is determined or the advertisement is determined, the process returns to step SP22, and the return processing from step SP23 to step SP 2_2 is performed repeatedly until the network is determined or the advertisement is set to the program. This is at step .SP 2 3 and judged and determined When the network or the confirmation advertisement is set in the program composition table 95, the next step is SP 2 4 to set the display of the determination frame 130 attached to the determination frame set in the determination network or the determination advertisement. Device and display color. Next, in step SP 2 5, the information about the setting frame thus set is registered on the DB server 7. The setting frame (2) of the setting frame is attached to the determination of the setting frame. Frame with 1 3 0 phase If the relevant information is set, then follow the setting procedure (2) of the confirmation frame as shown in Figure 18 to set the composition in the confirmation frame. Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Note the refill this page) That is, according to the setting procedure (2) of the determination box of the program composition table, first at step SP 3 0 on the console terminal 1 8 from the DB server 7 by the program of the program composition table. After reading the program composition file FD and initial setting, the program composition table 9 5 is displayed on the monitor screen of the console terminal 18 at step SP 31. This is at step SP 3 2 and the program composition table 9 displayed on the screen is displayed. 5 If instructed to end, the procedure for setting the confirmation box is immediately ended (2) 0 In addition to step SP 3 2, the specified paper size in the program composition table 9 5 applies the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 specification (210X297 public dream) ) A7 ^ ________B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (51) When the frame is not set, the process moves to step SP 3 3. In step SP 3 3, determine Whether the broadcast time (hereinafter, simply referred to as the composition time) of the composition set in the determination frame is changed. In this step SP 3 3, when it is determined that the composition time in the determination frame is changed, proceed to step s P 3 4 In addition, when the composition time set in the determination frame is not changed, the process returns to step 骡 SP 3 2 and the return processing from step SP 3 3 to step SP 3 2 is performed until the composition time in the determination frame is changed. Are being repeatedly implemented. At this step s P 3 4, the total frame time set in the determination frame (hereinafter referred to as the time in the determination frame) is subtracted from the total time of the composition set in the determination frame to calculate the determination frame. Within the residual time A. Then, in the next step s P 3 5, it is determined whether the residual time A is smaller than 0. As a result, when the residual time is smaller than 0, the process proceeds to step SP 36 to display the background color of the determination frame as, for example, red. This allows the operator to judge that the remaining time A in the determination frame is still there. In addition, based on the determination result of step SP25, if the residual time is 0 or more, the process moves to step SP37 to display the background color of the determination frame as, for example, blue. This allows the operator to judge that the remaining time A in the determination frame is gone. After the processing of step SP 36 or SP 37 is completed, the setting time of the set determination frame is registered in DB servo 7 at step SP 38 and the process moves to step SP32. In this case, the information about the remaining time of the confirmation frame can be displayed in the confirmation · frame highlighting menu 1 3 2 and the operator can view the paper frame of the confirmation frame. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 Regulations (210 × 297). #) {Please read the precautions before filling in this page) -Order- -54- Printed by A7-B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (52) Explicit menu 1 3 2 The display data of the frame column 1 3 5 and the remaining time block 1 3 6 are determined, and the composition is set at the determination frame. The composition time in the determination frame is set in this way, and through the processing of step SP 37, when there is no excessive or too little step SP3 in the determination frame, the setting procedure of the determination frame is ended (2). (4-1) The operation and effect are as described above. When the console terminal 18 of the news program production support section 2 produces a program configuration table 95, the console terminal 18 is first transmitted from the DB server 7 through the LAN 8 The program composition file FD is read out, and then the program data C 1 of the program composition file FD is displayed on the screen as the data of the program composition table 95 by application software for creating a program production table. In this case, if the application software for program creation table creation determines that there is a confirmation frame between the specified determination items set in the program material C 0, the left side of the determination frame item number 9 7 corresponds to The definite frame of the "program" is displayed in a range of 1 to 3 in a manner that the definite frame has a color difference. In this way, the operator can easily visually confirm the determination item (or composition) and determination frame in the program composition table 95, and at the same time, the range of the confirmation frame can be easily recognized. Further, the determination frame bands attached to the determination frames can be easily identified by setting them to be displayed in different colors. Here, the operator touches the item number 9 of the target "item" and operates the insert button, the add button, etc. displayed on the terminal screen, so that ___ n _ II _ n.). · Nn _ I HI T — — — — — N ΦΤΊ --I I--I-! IIIII i, 1Ί- —— — ———— — I (Notes for reading 'Back 16 before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 is now available (2 丨 0 > < 297 gong) • 55- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives A7-_____B7_____ V. Description of Invention (53) Purpose "Project" Setting Composition At the same time, for the set composition, the composition time in the composition time column 9 9 is set by numeric key input. This is the setting set in the confirmation box of the program composition table 95, and the input residual time button 131 is touched. This confirms that the frame highlighting menu 1 3 2 is superimposed on the program composition table 9 5 and displayed on the screen. Here, the confirmation box highlights the menu 1 3 2 and the number corresponding to the determination box displayed in the "program" of the program composition table 9 5 is displayed by the determination box number column 1 3 5 and the determination of each determination box The residual time in the frame is displayed in the residual time column 1 3 6. In this way, the operator can set the composition time in the determination frame by referring to the remaining time in the determination frame for each determination frame at the same time. Based on the above configuration, when creating a program composition table 95, when setting the items of the confirmation frame between the determination items, next to the item number of the determination frame, the determination frame band corresponding to the length of the range of the determination frame is distinguished from the background color. The color display can make it easy for the operator to distinguish the determination frame visually, and prevent accidents of overlooking the determination frame from happening. Furthermore, the color of each determination frame is set to different colors according to the difference of each determination frame, thereby making each determination frame visible and making it easy for the operator to recognize visually. Furthermore, in order to identify each confirmation frame individually, a determination frame number is assigned, and each of the determination frames corresponds to the remaining time in the determination frame and is displayed by highlighting the explicit menu 1 3 2 in the determination frame, thereby setting items in the determination frame. , The operator confirms that the confirmation box displayed in the program composition table 9 5 is confirmed by confirming the frame with 1 3 0, and confirms that the k-scales of the actual samples are applicable to the Chinese national standard ( CNS) _A4 specifications (210X297) 漦 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Revision 56- Printed by A7 · B7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (54) The remaining time can be set at the same time. In addition, the display color of the composition time column 9 9 is displayed in red when the total composition time in the confirmation frame that is currently set is less than the determination frame time, and the total composition time in the determination frame is the same as the time in the determination frame. , Or more when it is displayed in blue, so that when setting the composition in the determination frame, the operator can easily determine whether the composition time exceeds the time in the determination frame. This makes it easy to identify whether the composition time is too long or insufficient when determining the frame setting composition. (4 to 4) Other Embodiments Although the above-mentioned embodiment allocates an item or a composition to a specified determination frame, the display color of the composition time column 99 in the determination frame is displayed in red when the time in the determination frame is not satisfied. The case where blue is displayed when the time in the frame is determined to be longer than the time will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set to other colors other than red and blue. Further, for determining the time in the frame, when the remaining time A of the composition time is exactly 0, the display color of the composition time column 9 9 is set to, for example, yellow, thereby determining whether the time in the frame is not full and When the time in the frame is determined to be more than the total time of the composition time in the frame and whether the time in the frame is exactly the same, the setting time in the frame can be determined more accurately or not. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, in the case of assigning an item or a composition to a specified determination frame, the remaining time of the composition time is highlighted in the determination frame 9 1 to display a case corresponding to the determination frame number, but (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) — / 1 · This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ4 Regulation (210X297) # 57-Printed by Zhengong Consumer Cooperative, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs ¾ A7 ·· ___B7 V. Description of the invention (55) The invention is not limited to this. For example, next to the confirmation box of the program composition table 95, the time within the confirmation box of each determination box shows the remaining time of the composition time. The method is also possible, so that the confirmation time can be set at the same time as the composition time and the residual time. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, when the designated determination frame is assigned with an item or a composition, a case where the composition time column 99 and the determination frame band 130 in the determination frame are distinguished from the color of the background portion and displayed is described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed in a flashing manner. In other words, as long as it is a display method that easily distinguishes an item or a determination frame constituting an assigned object from other items, Just display it. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, a description is given of a case where the manner of setting the determination frame is displayed corresponding to the determination frame, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the determination frame is displayed in color or displayed blinking. In this way, the items of the determination frame and the determination item and the determination advertisement may be visually different from each other. This makes it easy to identify the determination item, the determination advertisement, and the determination frame, and the same effects as those of the above embodiment can be obtained. (5) Entry / change of the program composition table (5-1) The entry / change of the program composition table is shown in FIG. 19, and the console terminal 18 is provided with a plurality of workstations 18A1 to 18An. For example, in Work station 1 8A 1, as shown in FIG. 20, when data entry or change is performed for item "Headline 1" 140A in the program composition table 95, for example, "click on the entry / change target item" Headline 1 "I nn--nnn n ... ^. N I n I n ITIII nnn ^) 1 -6 (¾Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) M current nuclear (210X297 cm) -58- A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (56) Lock button 1 4 1. As a result, the application software of the program composition table of the workstation 1 8A 1 designates the entry / change access for the item "Headline 1" 140A, that is, the designated entry / change access is locked, and the entry / change access for the item is designated The information is transmitted from the workstation 1 8 A 1 to the DB server 7 through the LAN 8. . When the DB server 7 receives information about this input / change access, for the item "headline 1" 1 4 0A of the program composition table 9 5 to raise the item use flag ", so that the DB server 7 for Workstations 18A2 to 18An other than Workstation 18A1 can prohibit the entry / change of items "headline 1". That is, the access prohibition setting for the entry / change of the item "Headline 1" 1 4 0 A at the workstation 1 8 A 1 is canceled until the workstation 1 8 A 1 is released by the lock button 1 4 1 The locked state that prohibits input / change access from other terminals continues. As shown in Fig. 21, if entry / change access to the item "Headline 1" 140A is prohibited at workstation 1 8A 1, the "Lock" display color of the lock button 141 of the item "Headline 1" is displayed on the surrounding The colors become different. In this case, for example, when the background color is white, the “Lock” color of the lock button 1 4 1 that was touched on workstation 1 8A 1 is displayed in red, and the programs displayed on other workstations 1 8A2 to 1 8An are displayed at the same time. The items “Lock” in Table 9 5 are displayed in yellow. Therefore, because the multiple workstations 1 8A1 to 1 8An connected to the LAN 8 in parallel processing at the same time, is the color of the “Lock” of the lock button 1 4 1 yellow or red? Please fill in this page again) Ding-1 " This paper size is applicable to China National Standard Vehicle (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 public power) -59- Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives Printing Poly A7 .- ____B7 5. Description of the invention ( 57) It is easy to recognize whether the specified item displayed in the program composition table 95 is being input / changed in other terminals, that is, it is easy to recognize whether input / change access is possible on the own terminal. (5-2) Program input / change procedure of program composition table Actually, when inputting / changing the item data displayed on the program composition table 9 5 at each workstation 1 8A 1 ~ 1 8 An of the console terminal 18 Prohibition of input / change of input / change items from other terminals is implemented in accordance with the input / change procedure of the program composition table as shown in FIG. 22. The program composition table input / change procedure is first performed at step SP 4 0. The designated station 18A1 of the console terminal 18 reads out the program composition file FD from the DB server 7 and performs initial setting. Then, at step SP 4 1 1 8A 1 The program composition table creation application software 9 displays the program composition table 9 5 on the program registration screen 9 5 A. Here at step SP 4 2 If the program composition table 9 5 instructs the end, 'End at the workstation 1 8 Procedure for inputting / changing the program composition table of A1. In addition, if it is not instructed to end at step SP4 2, the process moves to step SP4. In this case, the processing of steps SP42 and SP43 is repeatedly performed during the period from step SP4 to the end of the program configuration table 95 as instructed. This paper in the program composition table 9 5 is designated for the purpose of inputting / changing. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 cm) (^ Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order-I. -60- Printed by A7 ,. B7______ of Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the Invention (58) If the item, the process moves to step s P 4 4 to determine whether the selected input / change destination item is already Items that prohibit entry / change of access are set on other terminals. If the specified item is an item whose input / change lock has been set, move to step SP 4 5 and display the error message "Cannot be selected as input / change item" in the message column of the program composition table 95, and then return to The process proceeds to step SP 4 2. In addition, in step SP4, if it is determined that the item after the designated input / change is not locked by other terminals for setting input / change, the process moves to step SP4. This is the case where an error message is displayed in the message bar 92. After eliminating the error message, move to the next step SP4 7 〇 In step SP43, for the purpose specified in the DB server, machine 7 "item" on the workstation 1 8 A 1 is set to indicate that the item for which input / change access is set is accessed using a flag. For workstations 1 8A 1 and other workstations 1 8A2 to 1 8An For the target "item" item, make it available on any workstation. The information entered / changed is reflected. In this way, the stations 1 8A2 to 18An other than the station 1 8A1 are displayed in the program composition table 8 5 on the screen, and the "item" set for the purpose of prohibiting input / change access in the station 1 8A 1 becomes impossible. Entered / changed access. Next, in step SP48, the data content of the target "item" is inputted / changed, and then in step SP49, it is determined whether or not to register the item data after the input / change. If the project data after input / change is not registered here, the process returns to step s P 4 8 again. In addition, the paper size of the registration variant is applicable to Zhongguan family materials (CNS M Vision (21GX297 public dream))--61--------------- I ------ order --- --- Wei \ i (¾Please read the notes on the back of the page before filling out this page) A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China 5.Invention description (59) For the project information later, move to In the next step s P 50, the program composition table 95 that has been entered / changed is converted into the program composition file FD and registered in the DB server 7. In step SP 5 0, the entry / change is registered. After the project is completed, "at the next step SP 5 1 whether the input / change lock should be released or not", if the input / change of the project data for the execution purpose is selected again, the input / change lock is not released and the process returns to step SP 4 8 Processing of inputting / changing the content of the fog data. In addition, in step SP 5 1, if the lock is unlocked without changing the project data, move to step SP 5 2 on the DB server 7, and the setting display is set to prohibit input / change access. The status of the item is released using the flag. In response to this DB server 7, setting input / change The flag is settled. The situation where the input / change lock is released is reflected in all the workstations 18A1 to 18An. Then the processing at the workstation 18A1 returns to the processing at step SP 4 2 and the processing at and below this step SP 4 2 In this way, if the input / change processing is completed for the data of the target "item", the program data C1, which has been entered or changed, is converted into the program configuration file FD in the program composition table 9 and registered in the DB server 7 (5-3) The operations and effects of the above configuration are applied to the news program production and delivery device 1, and the items displayed on the program configuration table 95 are from the console terminal 18. Work (, please read the notes on the back before filling this page) The paper size of the edition is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ Xinjiange (210X297) 犮 -62- Printed by A7, Consumers Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Description of the invention (60) When station 1 8A 1 ~ 1 8An performs input / change operations, first read the program composition from DB servo 7 at the designated workstation 18A1 In the case of FD, the program data C 1 recorded in the program composition file FD is displayed on the screen as the data of the program composition table 95. Here, the members of the Ministry of Information use the program composition table 95 as the input / change purpose. The designated item is set to input / change lock by touching the lock button 1 4 1, and the information of the input / change lock is transmitted to the other workstations 1 8A2 to 1 8An through the LAN server 7 and the DB server 7. From other workstations 1: 8A2 ~ 1 8An, the input / change access to the specified item can be prohibited. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 23, the terminal A cannot enter / change access from other terminal B to the item 3 (or structure 3) for which input / change access is prohibited. The purpose "item" is set so that item data can be input / changed only in the terminal A which is a setting prohibition input / change access and is locked. That is to say, the lock button 1 4 1 of the input / change lock setting target "item" is displayed in different colors of "Lock" at workstations 18A2 to 18An other than workstation 18A1, and it is easy to recognize the input / change "Item" where access is prohibited. Here, at the workstation 18A1, the input / change operation for the destination "item" is ended, and the entered / changed item data is registered in the program configuration file FD of the DB server 7, and the input / change access prohibition is set. Lifted. With this, all workstations 18A1 ~ 18An, once again apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 for this paper size (210X297 mm) ----------! ------ 1T-- ---- 戍} ί (讦 Read the back note first ¾ Item 4 fill in {¾ page) -63- Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (61) All prohibitions on the entry / change access are not set "Project" allows you to enter / change new project data. According to the above configuration, in the case where plural program stations 1 8A1 to 1An connected to the console terminal 18 are inputted / changed in parallel to the program composition table 9 5 'in plural terminals, for example, in the workstation 1 8 A 1 On the program composition table 9 5 displayed on the monitor screen, input / change access to the "item" setting for the purpose of entering / changing, and the "item" for the purpose can be prohibited from other workstations 1 8A2 ~ l: 8An terminal input / change access. In this way, when inputting / changing the item data of the program composition table 9 5 by parallel processing in a plurality of workstations 1 8A 1 ~ 1 8 An, the input / change of the target "item" setting is performed by one working workstation 1 8 A1. Locking can prevent the project data in the input / change operation from being input / changed by other workstations 18A2 ~ 18An, and prevent interference from other terminals to the target "project". In addition, this is the case for each workstation 18A1 ~ 18An, becoming Input / change lock is specified for each item of the input / change operation object * By this, the input / change operation of the item data can be performed independently and simultaneously in a plurality of workstations 18A2 to 18An. As for the workstations 1 8 A 1 to 1 8 A connected to the network, the program composition table 95 can be produced by parallel processing at the same time, and the work efficiency when producing the program composition table 95 is further improved. (5-4) Other embodiments This paper scale is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 public dream) (read the notes on the back first and then fill in the W) I) Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives Yinju

-64 · Printed A7 by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs-____________B7____ V. Description of the Invention (62) Although the above embodiment is directed to the use of multiple workstations. 1 8A 1 ~ 1 8 A η Simultaneous parallel processing When inputting / changing the project data of the program composition table 95, the station "8" is prohibited from entering / changing access to the terminal 18Α2 ~ 18Αη terminal of the project data for the purpose of setting the input / change lock of the project data. The occasion will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the case where the input / change of the designated "item" to other workstations 1 8Α2 ~ 1 8Αη is notified by identifying and displaying the items in the work, etc. Yes. This allows the workstations 18A2 to 18An to recognize that the project is working on the workstation 18A1, and it is possible to prevent simultaneous access to input / change from multiple terminals for the "item". In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the case of inputting / changing the item setting among the plurality of workstations 18A1 to 18Aη in the console terminal 18 is described, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as it is through the LAN 8 Any terminal connected to the network may be used, thereby obtaining the same efficiency as the above embodiment. (6) Operation mode of the constituent unit (6-1) The selection and display of the operation mode of the constituent unit are as shown in Fig. 24 and Fig. 25, and are displayed on the input terminal 34 which is a secondary mode switching means. The program composition table, or the program schedule displayed on the program schedule terminal 39, according to the program information C1 of the program schedule, and the "composition" of the smallest unit of the program from the top to the bottom Shown below. In addition, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification is applicable to the program composition table and this paper standard (2 丨 OX29 ·; public address ~ ~ (for the first reading, the other side: Jiang Yi matters, then fill out this page) -9 line 丨! Economy Department of Central Standards Bureau Consumers' Cooperative Printing Association Α7 Β7 V. Invention Description () 63; Program schedule, the overall operation mode of the "program" is the first mode. When it is set to the manual shooting operation mode, is there any press release? The necessity of the shooting switch (whether the control signal SC 1 as the "composition" for sending the timing signal is automatically generated in the automatic shooting operation mode as the second mode) is displayed in accordance with each "composition" of the program data C 1. That is, It is determined that the time of the period during which "J constitutes J" (hereinafter referred to as "composition time") is used to display the composition time number on the program composition table, and it is displayed that the automatic shooting operation mode is selected with an underline display system. · In addition, the lower part of the number showing the time on the program schedule is displayed with a band indicating that the automatic shooting operation mode is selected ( Slanted display). When entering this "composition", the machine control section 3 2 'synchronizes with the reference clock data in the TV station and starts counting. After the determined composition time, the next "composition" is automatically performed by the machine control section 32 The generated control signal SC 1 is automatically photographed and run. On the other hand, when the composition time is uncertain, the number of the composition time of the program composition table is displayed without the bottom line. In addition, the number of the composition time on the program schedule is displayed. The horizontal band does not appear on the lower part. After the composition time has elapsed after entering this "composition", the next "composition" is manually shot and operated by the operator pressing the control signal SC 1 generated by the shooting button. For example, at 18:00:00 When the shooting switch operates "composition 1" for manual shooting, the control signal SCI is automatically generated at 18:00:05 5 seconds after the composition time of "composition 1", and "composition 2" is automatically photographed and operated. "Composition 2" The control signal SCI is also automatically generated at 18:00:10 after 5 seconds by determining the composition time. The paper ^ standard applies the Chinese National Standard (CN.S) Λ4 坭Case (2 丨 0X297 public dream): -66-(Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) * 1T Printed by A7 B7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (64) "Composition 3 "The composition time of" Composition 3 "has not been determined, so after 18:01:10 of 1 minute, it is necessary for the operator to hold down the imaging switch to manually operate" Composition 4 ". In this way, the machine The control unit 32 executes the respective “compositions” by sequentially controlling the programs by the control signal SC 1 of the automatic shooting operation or the manual shooting operation, and simultaneously arranges the new program schedule schedule program data c 1 (program “ "Construction" data is displayed on the schedule. (6-2) Procedures for determining and canceling composition time Secondly, the "items" and "compositions" of the "program" that are manually shot and run are determined by the composition time determination and release procedures as shown in Fig. 26 , So you can arbitrarily change the operation method to automatic shooting operation. In addition, the "item" and "composition" of the composition time are determined, and the determination of the composition time is released by the procedure shown in Fig. 26. In other words, the sub-inside input terminal 34 enters from step SP60, and performs initial setting at step SP61 to move to step SP62. At step SP 6 2, the auxiliary internal input terminal 3 4 displays a program composition table such as shown in FIG. 2 7 on a display screen such as a touch panel method. Move to step SP 6 3 to determine whether the bet is over. Screen display buttons. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 6 3, the internal input terminal 3 4 judges that the end button displayed on the screen has not been pressed and moves to step SP 64, and determines whether the DUR (Duration) button 1 4 6 of the program composition table 145 is Press. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 6 4, the internal input terminal 3 4 returns to step SP 6 3 to repeat the previous paper. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 公 #) Note on the back, please fill out this page again) A-67- A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The procedure described in the description of invention (65). When the operator selects the "item" number or the "composition" number of the program composition table 1 4 5, the sub-input terminal 34 changes the selected "item" or "composition light-emitting color" to notify the operator of the selection status. Next, if the operator presses the OK DUR button 1 4 6 in the selection state, the vice input terminal 3 4 obtains a positive result at step SP 6 4 and moves to step SP 6 5. As shown in FIG. 2 8, the explicit menu 1 is highlighted. 4 7 is displayed superimposed on the program composition table 1 4 5. The display status at this time is shown in Figure 2-9. ... Next, the sub-input terminal 34 moves to step SP66 to determine whether the designated button 1 4 8 in the highlighted menu 1 4 7 has been pressed. If a negative result is obtained at step SP6, the input terminal of the assistant judges whether the designated button 1 4 8 is pressed and moves to step SP 6 7 to determine whether the release button 1 4 9 in the highlighted menu 1 4 7 is pressed. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 6 7, the sub-input terminal 3 4 judges whether the release button 1 4 9 has been pressed and moves to step SP 6 8 'judges whether the cancel button 1 5 7 in the highlighted menu 1 4 7 is Press. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 6 8, the deputy internal input terminal 3 4 'judges whether the cancel button 1 5 0 is pressed and moves to step SP 6 9. (Referred to as project time) or "composition", the composition time is displayed in the time display window 1 5 1 in the prominent menu 1 4 7. For example, if the first "composition" of the item name "Headline 1" in Fig. 29 is selected, as shown in Fig. 28, it will be displayed in the time display window (¾ Read the precautions on the back before writing 4) (This page)

This paper size is applicable to China National Elephant Standard (CNS) M specification (2 丨 〇 X 297)

• Printed by DO Consumer Central Cooperative Bureau of Ministry of Economic Affairs ΑΊ _ Β7 ____ V. Description of Invention (66) 00 minutes 10 seconds. After that, the sub-input terminal 34 returns to step SP66 and repeats the above procedure. That is, in step SP 69, the operator can press the triangular time adjustment button 1 52 near the time display window 1 51, or adjust the time or the composition time of the item input by the keyboard. After that, if the operator presses the designated button 1 4 8, the assistant input terminal 3 4 will obtain a positive result at step SP 66 and move to step SP 7 〇 to determine the selected "item" or "composition" Composition time. As a result, as shown in Fig. 30, the number "0 ·· 1 0" at the composition time of the "headline 1 J number 1" composition "of the program composition table 145 is displayed as an underline. . Next, the sub-inside input terminal 3 4 moves to step SP7 1 'to determine whether or not all the composition times in the "item" including the selected "composition" have been determined. If an affirmative result is obtained at step SP 71, the sub-inside input terminal 34 judges that the total composition time in this "item" is determined and moves to step SP72 'to determine the project time. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 30, the number "00: 10" of the item time of "headline 1" of the program composition table 145 is displayed as an underline. Next, the sub-input terminal 3 4 moves to step SP73 »On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained at step SP7i, the sub-input terminal 3 4 'judges that the component time in this" item "is determined and moved. Go to step SP 7 3. At step SP73, enter the input terminal 3 4 and register the information of the “item” or “composition” whose composition time is determined to the DB server 7. Move to step SP 7 4 and only display the closed highlight menu i 4 7 Please read the notes on the back of the program before writing this page.) 4 The size of the paper iterations (CNS) _______B7____ V. Description of the invention (67) Composition table 1 4 5. The program composition table 1 4 5 at this time is shown in Fig. 31. After that, the deputy input terminal 34 returns to step SP 6 3 to repeat the above. In this way, the "project" or "composition" whose composition time is determined is set to the automatic shooting operation.-Here, the operator presses the highlighted menu 1 4 If the release button 149 in 7 is selected, the sub-input terminal 34 obtains a positive result in step SP67 and moves to step SP7 5 to cancel the determination of the composition time of the selected "item" or "composition". Step SP 7 6, the internal input terminal 3 4 judges that It will be determined whether the project time of the "project" of the "composition" to be released is determined. If a positive result is obtained in step SP 7 6, the sub-input terminal 3 4 judges that the project time is determined and moves to step SP 7 7. The determination of the time of the release of the "item" is moved to step SP 7 3. On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained at step SP 7 6, the sub-input terminal 3 4 judges that the time of the item has not been determined and moves to step s. P 7 3. With this, the composition time of the selected "item" or "composition" is released and determined to be a manual shooting operation. When the operator presses the cancel button 1 4 7 in the highlighted menu 1 4 7 'Vice The internal input terminal 3 4 obtains a positive result at step SP 6 8 and moves to step SP 7 4. After completing the determination of the project time or the composition time or canceling the 'operator pressing the end button displayed on the screen, the internal input terminal 34. Affirmative results are obtained at step SP63, by which the internal input terminal 3 4 is moved to step SP 7 8 to end the program composition table 1 4 5 This paper size is suitable for financial and family care (CNS) Eight 4 Lin (21GX297 public momentum ) ~- -70- {Read the notes on the back before filling this page)

1T -__ A7 B7 V. Display of invention description (68). In other words, the operator can select any number of "project" numbers or "" composition "numbers at the determination or release of the project time or the composition time. When the "program" is broadcast, press the "composition" of the composition time to confirm that the shooting switch has passed the composition time, and the next "composition" is automatically shot and run. On the other hand, "items" and "compositions" of "programs" whose composition time is determined in advance are necessarily automatically photographed and run. Furthermore, the "composition" of the advertising time and the time sent by the Internet, the composition time is automatically confirmed and must be: it will be automatically shot and run. (6 — 3) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (Notes on the front 16 / h fill in this page) The above structure, for example, as shown in Figure 32, consider The status of the news program "Wrap Up Today" including "composition" broadcast live is being sent. In the program schedule terminal 39, the news program "Wrap Up Today" delivered from 18: 00: 0 to 18: 25: 0: 00 starts at 18: 00: 0 At the beginning, the program schedule from the item title "Headline 1" to the fourth item title "Advertisement schedule movie segment" is displayed on the display screen. At present, at the terminal 39 of the program schedule, since "Headline 2" is being sent out, the ".composition" of "Headline 2" is displayed in two segments from above, and at the same time 5 seconds from the start time, 1 9 9 6 is displayed. The text "1996/05/10 18: 00: 15" at 18: 0: 15: 15 on May 10th of the year was set to the manual shooting operation when the respective constituent times were determined at the console terminal 18. That is, in the operation mode, the display paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X29? Public address) according to the standard. -71-Printed A7 by the Bayer Consumer Cooperation Department of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 69) The display shows the text indicating the manual shooting operation ^ TAKE operation j 〇 Every day, since the part is broadcast in the same pattern, starting from "Headline 1 j", the project name "Kamigawa Prefecture Water Conservation Measures" If the automatic shooting operation is decided up to the "composition", the input terminal 3 4 is entered in the vice, and the composition time of the "composition" of "headline 1" and "headline 2" is determined. With this, the composition time of "Headline 1" and "Headline 2" on the program schedule is displayed with a horizontal band in the lower part of the text "0 0: 1 0", that is, the operator who sent it If "Title 1" is displayed on this horizontal band, the program will start to be delivered, and 20 seconds until "Kamigawa Prefecture Water Conservation Measures" is delivered can be freed from the complicated operation of pressing the shooting button twice. As a result, the manual operation is simplified when the "program" is sent, lightening the operator's burden, and further reducing manual operation errors. (6-4) Effect According to the above configuration, the manual shooting operation mode and automatic shooting operation mode can be switched to generate the control signal SCI of the "composition" on the rear side of the two "compositions" that are continuously arranged on the program schedule. When the overall operation mode of the "program" is set to the manual shooting operation mode, the control signal SC 1 of the "composition" on the rear side is generated in the automatic shooting operation mode. At the same time, it is necessary to display the operation by pressing the shooting button by the operator. On the schedule screen of the program, by sending the plural “compositions” in sequence according to the schedule of the program, the manual operation of the paper can be further prevented. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297) (Installation) {For the precautions for reading first, then fill out this page) Order A7 * B7 printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Explanation of the invention (70) Error. In addition, according to the new program configuration table which is set to the manual shooting operation mode, when the "program j is sent out", the continuous plural "composition" control signal SC 1 is switched to the automatic shooting operation mode in a short time. It is possible to avoid manual operation errors when sending out this "composition", and to send out without error. (6-5) Other Embodiments Although the above-mentioned fishing embodiment is described in the case of sending video and audio, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it can also be applied to sending only audio. (7) The starting time of the constituent unit (Figure 33 to Figure 37) (7-1) The starting time of the constituent unit is determined and displayed as shown in Figure 33, as a mode switching means in the input terminal 3 of the sub-unit The displayed program composition table 1 5 5 shows the program material C 1 according to the program schedule, and the respective “composition” of the smallest unit of the program is displayed from the top to the bottom in the order of sending. In addition, when the operation mode of the "program" is set to the manual shooting operation mode as the first mode, the program composition table 1 5 5 shows whether the start time of an arbitrary "composition" is determined (whether it is determined as an arbitrary determined Automatically generates this as the "automatic shooting operation mode of the second mode of the control signal SC 1 constituting the sending timing signal of j." That is, as shown in Figs. 3 to 4, an arbitrary "composition" is determined. _ Ding (Please read the notes on the reverse side before filling out this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS > A4 size (210X297 public dream) -73- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ A7 ·, _B7 V. Description of the invention (71) When the start time of at least one of the video and sound is displayed in the program composition table 1 5 5 at the fixed time notification column 1 06, the designated mark is displayed (here is a diamond The number with a frame in the shape) 1 5 7. This symbol 1 5 7 is displayed at a position corresponding to an arbitrary time determined in the confirmation time notification column 1 06. In addition, as in the third 5 As shown in the figure, if the start time is determined, the designated time will be displayed in the notification column 1 5 9 at the scheduled time of the program schedule 1 5 8 to display the designated mark (here, the rectangle and diamond-shaped numbers with an outer frame) 1 6 0 » This symbol 16 iron is displayed at a position corresponding to an arbitrary time determined in the determination time notification column 1 59. The operator can be arbitrarily selected without being associated with the start time set in advance in this "composition". The start time of the video and sound is determined at all times. The machine control unit 3 2 counts according to the reference clock data in the TV station. When the start time is reached, a control signal SC 1 is automatically generated. The "constructed" video or sound is automatically shot and run. On the one hand, if the delivery time of the "composition" is not determined, the display block 1 06 and 15 9 will be notified at the determined time. 1 57 and 1 60 »That is, the operator can determine, for example, for each" program " The start time of a maximum of 5 "compositions." (7-2) The procedure for determining the start time '. Second, the "composition" of the "program" that was manually shot and run as shown in Figure 36 The start time is determined according to the determination procedure of the start time. That is, the sub-input terminal 3 4 enters step SP 8 from step SP 8 0 to step SP 8 1 and then moves to step SP 8 2. At step SP 8 2, the sub-input Input terminal 3 4 displays on the display screen, for example, __- n I-I _ I n.} Nn _ n ϋ IT nnnn — ϋ — -0 讦 (Please read the notes on the back ¾ before filling this page ) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) -74- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7: ___B7 V. Description of Invention (72) 33 The table 155 moves to step SP83, and determines whether or not the end button of the screen display is pressed. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 8 3, the sub-inside input terminal 34 judges that the end button displayed on the screen has not been pressed and moves to step SP 8 4 and judges that it is arranged in the program composition table 1 5 5 at the confirmation time notification column 1 The determination of the upper end of 0 6 and 1 5 9 tells whether or not the bar has been pressed. If a negative result is obtained at step SP84, the sub-inside input terminal 34 returns to step SP83 to repeat the above procedure. If the operator presses the confirmation time notification bar 1 06 and 1 59, the deputy input terminal 3 4 will obtain a positive result at step SP 8 4 and move to step SP 8 5 to display the settings for use as shown in Fig. 37. Highlight menu 162. Next, the sub-input terminal 34 moves to step SP86 to determine whether the close button 1 6 3 in the highlighted menu 16 is pressed. If a negative result is obtained in step SP8, the sub-inside input terminal 34 judges whether the close button 1 6 3 has been pressed and moves to step SP87. In step SP 87, the sub-input terminal 34 is input with the sent video and audio theme. For example, in Figure 37, when the sound file (AF) is sent for 15 seconds from 18:24:45, 5 seconds, enter the start time and the subject of the submission in the highlight menu 1 62. If the input start time, the sent video, and the audio theme are displayed in the highlight menu 1 6 2 at step SP 8 7 respectively, the sub-input terminal 3 4 returns to step SP 8 to repeat the above procedure. After that, if you press the off switch in the highlighted menu 1 6 2 this paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297) 蝥 ______ I __) · 11 _ I _ — 丁 __— II-泉 ( " Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page) A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ V. Description of the invention (73) 1 1 1 6 3 If the input terminal 3 4 »In step SP 8 6 Obtain Ken 1 1 Set the result to step SP 8 8 〇 At step SP 8 8 j Enter the terminal 1 I terminal 3 4 Determine whether the start time has been entered correctly. For example, enter "Program 1 | J's sending time zone" If it is not at the other time, 9 pairs of input terminals 3 4 in step M read 1 1 step SP 8 8 obtained a negative result judged that the correct start time is not entered 1 1 A > move to step SP 8 9 〇 in step SP 8 9 Note on the input terminal in the sub 1 1 3 4 Change the display color of the part that is not entered correctly in the highlighted menu and fill in 1 1 Return to step S P 8 6 Repeat the above procedure 0% This page • W *) I If the start time is entered correctly, the internal input terminal 3 4 1 | Obtain a positive result at step SP 8 8 Move to step SP 9 0 〇 At step 1 1 ISP 9 0 Input terminal 3 4 in the secondary, will display the highlighted menu 1 6 2 with 1 1 order 1 normal color display, move to step SP 9 1 register the input start time > image and sound data in DB Servo tamper 7 〇 By this, the start time of the image and sound input by 1 I is determined. 0 1 I Then input the final m 3 4 in the vice, move to step SP 9 2 Close the projection 1 1 竦 Explicit menu 1 6 2. In addition, as shown in Fig. 3 4, the input terminal of the sub-inside) / 1 1 3 4 ′ displays the mark 15 7 at the position corresponding to the specified time to inform the tentator 1 0 6 1 1 at the determined time. Input terminal 3 4 9 Return to step 1 1 SP 8 3 Repeat the above procedure . 1 I so > Determine the arbitrary Γ composition "At the start time, the operator presses the 1 1 I end button displayed on the screen. The input terminal 3 in the sub 1 is obtained in step 1 1 SP 8 3. With this, the input terminal in the sub 1 3 4, move to 1 1 Step SP 9 3 Procedure for determining the end start time 0 1 1 when the start time is reached> The theme of the factory at which the start time is determined "Bai Dong was sent out 0 1 1 This paper size applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 males; ^) -76- A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (74) That is, at step s P 8 7 the operator starts by empty Designation, you can start the subject matter specified at this start time. That is, when the determined start time is reached, the machine control section 32 starts the designated subject matter, and the fade-in and fade-out control of the sound is not performed. When the highlight menu 1 2 is displayed, the operator selects the image or sound of the desired "composition" and presses the delete button (not shown) to release the determination of the start time of the "composition". In addition, when the highlighted menu 1 6 2 is displayed, the operator can cancel the determination of the start time by pressing the cancel operation button (not shown). (7-3) Operation Based on the above configuration, for example, as shown in Fig. 35, consider a scenario in which a news program "Wrap Up Today" including "composition" which is broadcast live is sent. The program schedule schedule terminal 39 will start at 18: 00: 00: 00 and start at 18: 25: 05: 0. "(Here," START ") The program schedule from the initial project name" Headline 1 "to the fourth project name" Advertising Program Video Segment "is displayed on the display screen. Now, at the terminal 39 of the program schedule, "Headline 1" is being shown in the broadcast, and the "composition" of "Headline 1" is displayed in two segments from the top. At the same time, 5 seconds have elapsed from the time of sending. 9 The text "1996/05/10 1 8:00 05" on May 10, 2006, at 18: 0: 05 is displayed in the current time display field. This news program "(Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) The size of the paper used for this edition is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 Gong) -77- Printed by A7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economy · _____ ._B7 V. Description of the Invention (75) Wrap Up Today "The overall operation mode is set to the manual shooting operation mode when the respective composition time is determined at the console terminal 18. That is, the text “TAKE RUN” indicating that the camera is in the manual shooting operation mode is displayed in the operation mode display field. Here, enter the terminal 3 4 in the vice, and press the confirmation time notification column 1 5 9 to display the highlighted menu 1 6 2. If the theme is entered, the corresponding time will be notified in the column 1 5 9 At the start time, a mark 160 is displayed. In addition, the operator who is the person responsible for the delivery will send the subject matter entered in the notification box at the fixed time even if it is delivered by hand-travel shooting. As a result, the subject matter that must be delivered at the time of delivery will not be forgotten to be delivered. The manual operation will be simplified during the delivery, the operator's burden will be reduced, and manual operation errors can be further reduced. (7 — 4) Effect According to the above structure, the control signal SC 1 of the "unit" of the smallest unit of the "program" can be generated by switching between the manual shooting operation mode and the automatic shooting operation mode, and the entire "program" is sent out. When the mode is set to the manual shooting operation mode, the start time of an arbitrary "composition" is determined at an arbitrary time and a control signal SC 1 is automatically generated, so that a plurality of "compositions" are manually operated in accordance with the program schedule. When submitting, "arbitrary" composition "can be correctly delivered at any time" In addition, the number of assignments in the "program" transmission is reduced, and the "theme" that has determined the start time is displayed on the program schedule with a mark of 160 Draw {" read the notes on the back of the book before filling in {clever page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 public expense) -78- Printed by A7 __B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards 、 Explanation of the invention (76) ~~~~ On the notification page of the determined time on the page 1 5 9 'In this way, the operator of the broadcast can concentrate on the original (7-5) Other embodiments are described in the above-mentioned embodiment. Although the description is given to the case of sending video and audio, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the case of sending only audio can also be applied. (8) Changes to the next structure (Figures 38 to 40) (8-1) The sequence of the structure is changed and displayed as shown in Figure 9, as a means of changing the delivery order on the program schedule On the program schedule 1 15 displayed on the terminal 39, according to the program data C1, the "composition" of the respective partial programs as the minimum unit of the program is displayed from the top to the bottom in accordance with the sending order. At this time, the "composition" in the submission is displayed in the displayed plural "composition" in the second paragraph from the top. The display screen of the program schedule terminal 39 is provided with a touch-sensitive panel device that detects a touch operation by the operator. The terminal 39 of the program schedule can be changed to any order by the operation of the operator. The "items" and "composition" on the program schedule 1 15 can be changed irrespective of whether it has been sent. At this time, the programming schedule terminal 39 rewrites or moves the "constituting" programming schedule information in response to the operator's operation, and rewrites the program guests in the DB server 7 as a means of reading the programming schedule record. C 1. This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 Regulations (210X297 公 #) (Please read the notes on the back side first and then fill out this page) --79- The Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives ’Seal A7 ____B7 _Five (77) In this way, based on the rewritten program material C1, the machine control unit 32, which is the control means, sends out the respective "compositions" in order to carry out the program, and at the same time schedules the new program schedule. The program data C1 is displayed on the program schedule 1 1 5. In addition, the machine control unit 32 starts the "composed" video / audio data S VI to the switcher based on the switching information included in the rewritten program data C 1 / Mixer 30 sends a command to the broadcast server unit 22, which is the means for reading the program. The broadcast server unit 22 can "randomly access" the "constructed" image of the rewritten purpose / Sound data SV 1 will be sent immediately in response to this command. Here, the description will be given of an arbitrary "composition" that is designated as the "composition" of the next "composition" (hereinafter, this is called the next one) The display status on the current program schedule 1 1 5 when displayed. As shown in Figure 38 (A), the current program schedule 1 1 5 shows the first to fifth " The composition mark of the subject matter is 166 to 170. In addition, the subject mark of the second "composition" 1 6 7 is displayed in a rectangular red frame 1 7 1 to inform the operator that the second "composition" is being sent out. The subject mark 1 6 8 is displayed in a rectangular green frame to inform the operator that the third "composition" is set to the next composition. When preparation for sending the subject is completed, its respective display buttons 16 6 to 1 70 Is displayed in white. When the preparation of the theme is not completed, gray is displayed in the frame of each of the display buttons 16 to 17 0. As shown in Figure 38 (B), for example, select the fifth "Composition", if pressed as shown in the lower part of the program schedule 115 in Figure 9 (Han first read the precautions on the back before filling out this page)

、 1T This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 gong) -80- A7 B7 Printed by the Central Laboratories of Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives V. Description of the invention (78) 1 I "N Ε X Τ Specify the J setting button 17 3 and set the schedule time 1 1 Table terminal 3 9 > Put the 5th "composition J to 3rd Γ constitute J-, a * ·-head U) 1 I 5th constitution J is designated as the next composition. As a result, the third paragraph of Fig. 38 (fi) ifi 1 1 has a green frame 17 2 and the fifth Γ constitutes the subject matter of J 1 7 0 Read n 1 1 to replace the third plant The subject mark 16 8 of the "composition" is displayed and divided by 0. The 5th If 1 1 factory constitution J The 3rd "composition" subject mark 1 6 8 Note-dr 1 I and 16 9 are moved down Displayed in order below the fourth paragraph. ○ Then open the item and then 1 1 I. Start the delivery of the theme of the 5th plant. Prepare to send out. 9 When the preparation is finished, fill out 1). Color switch from gray White. ί 1 1 Secondly, it can also be considered as shown in Figure 3 8 (C). For example, 1 1 choose the 5th Γ configuration. ”If you press the betting factory N XT designated J setting button 1 I delete the 3rd and 4th factory configuration J sets the 5th "composition J as the sub-construction I action." As a result, the 3rd paragraph in Fig. 38 (C) has a 5th "composition" theme mark with a green frame 1 1 1 7 2 1 7 0 is displayed. The 6th and 1 1th 7th "composing J and later" "the subject matter constituting J 1 5 and 1 7 6 1 1 9 are displayed below the fourth paragraph in order. Then the 5th Γ sending of the T subject matter constituting J Ready, when the feed is ready, the display color in the 1 I frame of the display button 17 0 changes from gray to white. 1 1 Secondly, as shown in the 3 8 iso figure (D), for example, choose to send 1 1 out before The 1st factory structure of the company "Press the set button 1 7 3 The program schedule 1 1 Schedule terminal 3 9 Insert the 1r structure" and copy it to the 3rd "structure J 1 I Specify the 1 Γ structure J as the next one Composition. In the third paragraph of Figure 3 1 (D) in Figure 3, the 1st plant composition with a green frame 1 7 2 is displayed. The subject matter 1 1 I mark 1 6 6 is displayed after the 3rd plant composition j. Theme mark 1 6 8 1 1 1 This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 male -81-printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 5 Description of the Invention (79) and 169 are sequentially displayed below the fourth paragraph. Then, the preparation for the first "composition" theme is prepared again. When the preparation for the delivery is completed, the display button of the third paragraph is displayed. The display color in the frame of 1 6 6 is changed from gray to white. An arbitrary "item" is designated as the "item" to be sent next to the "item" that is being sent out (hereinafter, this is called the next item) In this case, the above-mentioned "composition" may be renamed "project" to correspond to "applicability." When an arbitrary "project" is designated as the next item, all "compositions" included in this "project" are grouped and Move in groups. When "items" is selected, the "items" of the item list 1 7'7 displayed on the schedule 1 1 5 are selected. When the desired "items" are not displayed in the item list 177, Item list 1 7 7 Scroll buttons 1 7 8 and 17 9 make them scroll to display the desired "item". That is, the order of "items" or "composition" uses program schedule 1 1 5 of the lower part moves to the most The button 1 80, the replacement button 181, and the move button 182 can also be changed. The operation of selecting and changing the "item" or "composition" can be performed by pressing the restore button 1 8 3 (8-2). When the sequence change procedure designates an arbitrary "composition" as the next composition, the program schedule terminal 39 operates in accordance with the sequence change procedure of the composition shown in Fig. 39. The program scheduling schedule terminal 39 is entered in step SP95, and the initial setting is performed in step SP96, and the process moves to step SP97. In the steps __________} --______ 丁 ______-· 0, · {诮 Read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS > A4 now grid (210X297))- 82- Printed by A7 Consumer Products Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _________B7_____ V. Description of the invention (80). S P 9 7, the program schedule schedule terminal 3 9 is in the touch-sensitive panel mode. The display screen displays, for example, the 9th The program schedule 1 shown in the figure moves to step SP 9 8 to determine whether the end button of the screen display is pressed. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 9 8, the program schedule terminal 3 9 judges whether the screen is displayed. If the end button is not pressed, move to step SP9 9 and select "item" or "composition" to determine whether the setting button 1 7 3 on the program schedule 1 1 5 is pressed. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 9 9 Then, the program schedule schedule terminal 39 returns to step SP 9 8 and repeats the above procedure. When the operator selects "item" or "composition", the background color of the "item" or "composition" display button is cut off The operator will be informed. If the escrow setting button 17 is pressed, the program schedule terminal 39 will get a positive result at step SP 9 9 and move to step SP 100 to determine whether the "item" or Whether "composition" is selected. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 100, the program schedule terminal 39 judges that the "item" or "composition" that has not been sent out is selected and moves to step SP101. At step SP101, the program schedule The schedule terminal 39 judges whether "composition" is selected. If a positive result is obtained at step SP 101, the program schedule terminal 39 judges that "composition" is selected and moves to step SP102. At step SP102, the program schedule time The watch terminal generates a new program material C 1 where the selected "composition" data is moved to the position of the next composition, and at the same time, the display button of this "composition" shows that the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification ( 210X297 Male ») 〇〇 ----------) ------- 1T ------- (対 Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) A7 B7 Ministry of Economy Central Standards Bureau staff consumption Printed by Sakusha V. Description of the Invention (81) Move to step s P 1 0 3 at the position of the next one. At step SP 1 0 3, the program schedule terminal 3 9 will be selected by the "composition" by The program material C1, which is only scheduled for the next configuration, rewrites the program material C1 in the DB server 1 71. Thereafter, the program schedule terminal 39 is returned to step SP98 to repeat the above procedure. If a negative result is obtained at step SP101, the program schedule terminal 39 judges that "item" is selected and moves to step SP104. At step SP 104, the program schedule schedule terminal 39 generates a new program data C1, which moves all the "composition" data of the selected "item" to the position of the next item, and at the same time, this "item" The display button displayed on the program schedule 1 1 5 is moved to step SP 1 0 3 °. If a positive result is obtained at step SP 1 0 0, the program schedule terminal 3 9 judges that it is being sent or has already been sent. The sent "item J or" composition "is selected, and the process proceeds to step SP105. At step SP105, the program schedule terminal 39 judges whether "composition" is selected. If a positive result is obtained at step SP105, the program schedule terminal 39 judges that "composition" is selected and moves to step SP106. At step SP1 06, the program schedule schedule terminal 39 generates a new program material C1 which copies the selected "composition" data to the position of the next composition, and displays the display button of this "composition" at the same time A structured position moves to step SP 103. If a negative result is obtained at step SP105, the program schedule terminal 39 judges that "item" is selected and moves to step SP107. -II 一 II 1: II nn In ^^^ 1 mn ^ — 1 ^ 1 ^-· I— mi ^ (Please read the notes on the reverse side before filling out this page) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (2 丨 0X297 public power) • 84- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (82) At step SP 1 0 7, the program schedule schedule terminal 3 9 will be selected All the "construction" data of the "item" are copied to the new program data C 1 in the position of the next item, and the display button of this "item" is displayed at the position of the next component on the program schedule 115 and moved to Step SP 1 0 3. In this way, if any "item" is designated as the next item, "designate" is designated as the next item, and if the operator presses the end button displayed on the screen, the program schedule terminal 3 9 is obtained at step SP 9 8 Sure result. With this, the program schedule terminal 39 moves to step SP 108 to end the sequence change procedure of the composition. (8-3) Considering the above structure, for example, consider that it is not possible to place the first "structure (VF synthesis rear part)" of the "item (Kanagawa Prefecture water countermeasures)" with the number 3b as shown in Figure 9 at the scheduled time (18 : 01: 30). As shown in FIG. 40 (A), in this case, the operator designates the NV (news video: Water of Sagami Lake) of "Project (Kanagawa Prefecture Water Countermeasures)" No. 3 a as the delivery, and for example, 3 b The second "Composition (for NV households)" in the "Project" is designated as the next composition. The program schedule terminal 39 will rewrite the program data C 1 in the DB server 7 so that the second "composition (for NV households)" will be moved before the first "composition (for the rear of the VF composition)". ready. As a result, as shown in Figure 40 (B), the program schedule terminal 39 replaces "composition (for NV households)" with "composition (this paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4" (210X297) (Public address) II I nn-I nn I I- i III nn T in nnni ----- i -9¾ (Please read the notes on the back of the next page and fill in this page again) -85- Zhengong, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs The consumer cooperative prints A 7 * ______B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (83) Rear of VF synthesis) "and displayed. After that, if the operator manually shoots the operation at is: 01: 30, the broadcast server section 22 will randomly access it and immediately start sending out the rewritten image / sound data SV1 of the second "composition (NV household)". . (8-4) Effect According to the above structure, the program data C 1 in the randomly accessed DB server 7 is rewritten by the program schedule terminal 3 9 and the order of "item j or" composition "is changed. The program data C 1 sends the desired "item" or "composition" of the video / sound data SV 1 through the random access broadcast server unit 2 2 so that the plural "compositions" are transmitted according to the program schedule. In order to send, you can change any "composition" to the desired order and send it in a short time. In addition, it is easier to change the order of "items" or "compositions", reducing the operator's burden and preventing accidents caused by broadcasting due to negligent operation. Furthermore, since "composition" can be arbitrarily replaced and sent in a short time, emergency replacement of the program becomes possible. For example, it can be changed to a sudden and accidental program flexibly and quickly and broadcast. In addition, the present subject matter can be quickly responded to the occasion of re-presenting the subject matter. (8-5) The other embodiments are described in the above-mentioned embodiments. Although the description is given for the case of sending video and audio, the present invention is not based on This is a limitation, and it can also be applied when only sound is sent. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297 public wear) __I _______} ______ 丁 — — II__ά ^) / -'δ ^ {Read the notes on the back of 1 and then fill out this page) -86- Economy Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative A7, B7 V. Description of Invention (84) In addition to the above embodiment, although it is for the DB servo consisting of recording the program data C 1 and the video / audio data s V 1 on the hard disk, respectively The explanation will be given for the case of the machine 7 and the broadcasting server section 22, but the present invention is not limited to this. The program schedule information or the program content of the program is recorded on any recording medium that can be randomly accessed, for example, on a memory. It can also be applied to the occasion of body. (9) Preview setting (9-1) If the preview of the program is set here according to the preview of the program table, enter the terminal 3 4 in the vice, and first use the application software of the program production table to set the DB. The server 7 reads the program data C 1 of the program configuration file FD as the data of the program table 60 through the LAN 8. Here, as shown in FIG. 41, the program table 60 displayed on the screen of the sub-input terminal 34 is touched to enter the program "Evening News" 1 8A of the preview performance, so that the program "Evening News" "188A's color is changed and displayed. This will allow you to identify the project for which you want to preview. Next, enter the terminal 3 4 from the menu bar 8 0A of the program table 60 0 to select the preview preview button 1 8 9 "Rehearsal" and click the program "Evening News" 1 8 8A to be registered in the DB server as a preview item. 7. In this case, as shown in FIG. 42, "(pre)" is displayed on the program "Evening News" 188A, whereby the program table 60 can confirm that a preview has been set for the program "Evening News" 1 8 A. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Regulation (210X297 mm) ---------- i ------- Order ------ Flavor Please fill out this page again) -87- A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (85) 1 1 (9 — *. 2) The preview setting according to the festival composition table 1 1 Borrow If the section giant table is set to preview the specified section giant, then the section 1 will be previewed according to the section 1 I giant composition table. That is, the terminal 1 1 I 3 4 will be input into the vice first. The software reads from the DB server 7 by reading I 1 LAN 8 and reads the section huge data C1 of the file FD. C 1 Display the back of the data 1 1 It is expected that the section 100 constitutes the table 9 5 0 Meaning 1 1 Next enter the sub inside Terminal 3 4 selects the menu item from the program composition table 9 5 again 1 | 8 0 B (Figure 6) selects the rehearsal designation button 1 9 0 (factory rehearsal J) copy) I click the As shown in Figure 4 3, it overlaps with section g to form Table 9 5 and page 1 1 shows the preview highlight menu 1 9 2 〇1 1 This is the sub-input terminal 3 4 First of all, the preview highlight menu 1 I Number of item hundred in 1 9 2 1 9 3 (shown in the factory item hundred N 0 J order I in the picture) Enter from the items displayed in the section giant composition table 9 5 with the number keys as 1 1 | Preview of the giant The item number is simultaneously entered in the start time column 1 4 (factory start 1 1 time J). Enter the preview start time of item 100 1 1 specified in the item number column 1 9 3 by the numeric keypad. In this embodiment, for example, the preview start is set. The time is' 1 1 7:30 0 minutes before the 100-thousand item is "Headline 1 J > Factory headline 2 J 1 I Water saving measures of the plant Kobegawa prefecture J. In the project number details 1 9 3 Designate from 1 1 Xiangju 1 to Xiangju 3 0 1 1 Here, the announcer will execute the highlight menu by touching the preview 1 9 2 1 1 Button 1 9 6 (The picture shows the factory implementation J), the highlight menu 1 I 1 9 2 is set in the preview rehearsal item and the start time information is registered in 1 1 | DB servo 7 0 1 1 Borrow Schedule a schedule for the festival at the designated time before the start of this rehearsal. 1 1 1 The quasi-standard home country and the middle school should use a moderate rule of paper. P. Gong 88 The Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs's Consumer Cooperatives printed A7. 86) The terminal 3 9 displays the schedule 1 1 5 showing information about the designated rehearsal item, and at the same time, each sending device is set to the standby state by the control of the device control section 32. In this case, when the preview is finished on the way, touch the stop button 1 9 2 of the preview highlight menu 1 9 2. (9 1-3) The preview setting program based on the program schedule Actually, the preview of the program is set in the sub-input terminal 34, which is implemented in accordance with the preview program by the program table shown in Fig. 44. To start the preview setting program according to the program 'table 60', first enter the terminal 3 in the sub-step at step SP 1 1 0 'to read the program configuration file FD from the DB server 7 through the program table management program and perform initial setting. Step SP 1 1 1 Display the program table 6 0 on the screen of the sub-input terminal 3 4 »Next, when the next step SP 1 1 2 is designated to end. 'The sub-input terminal 3 4 ends the preview based on the program table. Setting procedure 〇 In addition, if it is not instructed to end in step SP 1 12, the process proceeds to step SP 1 1 3 according to the processing in the sub-input terminal 3 4. In step SP 1 1 3, it is determined whether the pre-show designation button 1 8 9 of the program table 60 is touched. According to the determination result, when the pre-show designation button is touched, the process proceeds to step SP 1 1 4; If 1 8 9 is not touched, the process returns to step s P 1 1 2. From this step SP 1 1 3 to step s P 1 1 2 the process is performed on the schedule 6 0 until the preview preview button 1 8 9 "pre-show" is touched repeatedly. This is in the schedule 6 0 preview preview button 1 8 9 If it is touched, this paper size is suitable for household materials (CNS) Λ Grid (21GX297 gram) '-(For the precautions on the back, please read this page before filling in this page)

A 7 B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (87) Move to step SP 1 1 4 according to the processing of the deputy internal input terminal 3 4 and touch the program number in the program name block 6 1 which is the target of the preview. 6 5. If the "program" selected at this time is a "program" for which no preview has been designated, move to step SP 1 1 5 in the program name column 6 1 of the selected "program" to display the "pre-show" representing the preview. Abbreviated as "pre". The "program" designated as a preview in the program table 60 can be easily identified. In addition, in step SP 1 14, if the "program j" that has been designated as a "program" has been designated as a preview, move to Step SP 1 1 6 The abbreviation of "pre" displayed in the program name field 6 1 of the "program" selected in step SP 1 1 4 is deleted. In this way, if the rehearsal designation of program j is completed by step SP115 or SP116, the processing in the sub-input terminal 3 4 moves to step SP 1 1 7 and the setting of the rehearsal for the destination "program" is registered in the DB server 7 »This concludes the rehearsal setting of the program according to the schedule. (9-4) Printed according to the program setting table of the program composition. Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (next to the precautions on the back, then fill in (the clever page).) ”When the preview setting is completed, the terminal 3 4 is input into the vice, and the preview setting is performed in the project unit according to the program configuration table according to the program composition table as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 46. That is to say, if the preview setting process is started according to the program composition table, first at step SP 120, the input terminal 34 in the assistant reads the program composition table file FD from the DB server 7 by the application software of the program composition table. Applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (2! 0X297 public dream) -90- Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (88) Initial setting. Next, at step SP1 21, the program composition table 95 is displayed, and at the same time, the program material C1 of the program composition table file FD is displayed as the data of the program composition table 95. Next, at the next step s P 1 2 2, it is determined whether or not the instruction is ended. If the instruction is shown on the program composition table 9 5 displayed on the screen, the preview setting process is ended immediately. In addition, if it is determined in step SP1 2 2 that the instruction has not been completed, the process proceeds to step SP1 2 3 in accordance with the processing of the sub-input terminal 34. At step SP 1 2 3, it is determined whether the preview designation button 1 8 9 of the program composition table 95 is touched. Here, if the preview designation button 1.8 is touched, the process proceeds to step SP1 2 4, and when the preview designation button 1 8 9 is not touched, the process returns to step SP1 2 2. From this step SP 1 2 3 to the processing of step SP 1 2 2, it is repeatedly executed until the pre-show designation button 1 89 is touched in the program composition table 9 5 series. Secondly, select corresponding in step s P 1 2 4 When the item name column 9 6 of the object of the preview object is 9 6 and the item number 9 7 is touched, if the selected "item" is the "item" of the program not specified by the preview, proceed to step SP 1 2 5 displays the error message "No rehearsal specified" in the message column 9 2 and returns to step sp 1 2 2. In addition, if the "item" selected in step SP1 2 4 'is the "item" of the program designated by the preview, it proceeds to step sp 1 2 6. If an error message is displayed on the message bar 9 2 'After eliminating the error message, go to step s P 1 2 7 Overlaid on the program composition table 9 5 Display the preview highlight menu 1 9 2 ° This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 public dream) _ Q1 (Read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order economy, Shao Central Standards Bureau staff consumer cooperative printed A7 B7 V. Description of invention (89) Second In step SP 1 28, the processing of the sub-input terminal 34 selects the execution of the preview for the "program" of the designated preview, or stops the preview for the "program" for which the preview is set. In this case, first perform the rehearsal in step SP 1 2 8 and do not choose to stop the rehearsal in step SP 1 2 9; and in step SP 1 3 0 when the pre-run highlight menu 1 9 2 is not selected to be closed, in step SP 1 3 1 Enter the item number and start time of the target "item" of the rehearsal into the item number field 19 3 and the start time field 1 4 of the rehearsal highlight menu 1 9 2 and return to step SP 1 2 8. In addition, if the execution of the preview is not selected at step SP 1 2 8 and the preview is not suspended at step SP 1 2 9, and if the close of the preview preview menu 1 9 2 is selected at step SP 1 30, move to step SP 1 4 2 Immediately after closing the preview highlight menu 192 ', the process returns to step SP122. In addition, if the rehearsal is not selected in step SP 1 2 8 and if the rehearsal is selected in step SP 1 2 9, the process moves to step SP 1 3 2 to determine whether the item whose rehearsal is suspended is specified in step S P. 1 2 9 The "program" is currently being previewed. It is specified here that if the rehearsal item is not the "program" currently being executed, "go to step SP 1 3 3 and display an error message" Not in progress "in message box 9 2" and return to step SP 128. . In addition, if the suspended "item" is designated in step SP1 3 2 as the current or ongoing "program", the process proceeds to step SP1 3 4. This is the case where an error message is displayed in the message bar 92. 'Remove the error message. This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 is now (210X297). -92- (Fill in this page) — · ". Order the printing of A7 B7_ by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (90) and go to step SP141. Then, the rehearsal specified in step SP129 is stopped and registered in the DB server 7. In addition, when the execution of the preview is selected in step SP1 2 8 ', the process moves to step SP1 3 5 to determine whether the start time or end time of the preview that specifies the "item" of the preview execution overlaps with the time zone of the official broadcast. If the rehearsal start time or end time of the "item" specified in the rehearsal is specified here and the time zone of the official broadcast is overlapped, move to step SP 1 3 6 and display the "time repetition" error message in the message column 9 2 At step SP 1 2 8. In addition, if the start time or end time of the preview of the "project" for which the preview is to be performed does not overlap with the time zone of the official broadcast, proceed to step SP 1 3 7 »If an error message is displayed in the message column 9 2 here, The error message is eliminated and the process moves to step SP 1 3 8. Next, in step SP 1 38, it is determined whether the "item" designated for the preview run is the "item" that is currently being executed. If the "item" designated for the preview run is the "program" during the preview, move to step In the processing of SP 1 3 9, an “already in progress” error message is displayed in the message column 9 2, and the process returns to step SP 1 2 8. If the "item" specified in the preview is not the "program" currently being previewed, the process proceeds to step SP1 40. When an error message is displayed in the message column 92 here, the error message is eliminated and the process proceeds to step SP141. Next, in step SP141, the rehearsal designation in "items" is registered in the DB server 7. Then, in step SP14 2 close the rehearsal highlight menu 1 9 2 and return to the step. This paper scale applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS ) Λ4 specifications (2 丨 0X297 公 #〉 (Please read the precautions on the back of the sister first, then ¾¾ this page)

-93- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards and Mobilization of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (91) Processing of SP122. Here, if the preview setting of the "item" to be previewed is completely completed, the preview setting according to the program composition table can be ended. In this way, for the singular or plural "item" set in the program composition table 95 as the target, the setting of the preview execution in units of "items" or the setting of the ongoing preview is suspended, and the setting contents are registered in the DB server 7. As described above, the preview setting process based on the program configuration table is ended. (9-5) The action and effect are in the above configuration. When setting a preview for the program item, input terminal 34 in the vice, and read the program data C1 of the program configuration file FD from the DB server 7 through LAN8 as the program table. The data of 60 is displayed on the screen. In the program table 60, touch the item for entering the preview performance, and then touch the program preview instruction button 1 8 9 to enter the program table to set the preview. Then, for the program having completed the preview setting in this way, the preview is set by the program configuration table. In other words, input terminal 34 in the vice, and display the program material C1 of the program composition file FD as the material of the program composition table 70 on the screen, and select the preview designation button 1 8 9 of the program composition table 9 5 by clicking Overlapping on the program composition table 9 5 shows the preview replay highlight menu 19 2 ° By this simple method using the preview replay highlight menu 1 9 2, you can enter the designated items of the continuous "project" for the purpose of the preview By specifying the number, and then by entering the start time of the preview, the paper size of the preview can be applied to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ 心 兄 格 (210X297 公 犮). ) Order-94- Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. The information of the purpose of the invention description (92) and the start time are registered in the DB server 7. The preview of the "program" can be performed by simply inputting the program composition table 95 shown on the screen, and the part to be previewed can be specified and set in "item" units. This and the limited period of time before the official "program" is broadcast 'can also be implemented by setting the desired part of the "program" in the "item" unit of the "program". Furthermore, the preview start menu 1 9 2 is used to set the preview start time of the "item" of the preview performance as the program data C 1 and registered in the DB server 7 so as to be transmitted through the sending machine control terminal 3 1 of the sending machine control section 5. LAN8 reads out the program material C1, and automatically performs a preview based on the program material C1 at the time when the program's preview is set, which can make the operation of program production and program delivery more efficient. (9-6) Other embodiments are described in the above-mentioned embodiment. Although the pre-executing execution is set for the plural "items" of a continuous group, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, If the rehearsal is performed continuously for the project group from item 1 to item 4, the execution of the rehearsal may also be set for other consecutive project groups from item 6 to item 9 for example. In addition, in the above embodiment, although the item number block 193 displayed in the preview highlight menu 192, the item number for the preview in the start time column 194, and the case where the preview start time is set are described, the present invention It is not limited to this. For example, it will be displayed on the screen. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 丨 OX297). -Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _ B7 ___— V. Program composition table 9 of the invention description (93) 9 5 Item name column 9 6 Directly input and specify, and set a preview for the target project Yes. It is important to register the program schedule data in the displayed DB server 7 through the LAN 8 on a terminal that can access the program schedule data, so that the method of selecting a preview event can be performed, With this, it is possible to perform the preview setting of the project unit by simple input operation, and the same effect as that of the above embodiment can be obtained. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the case where a preview is set for a program in units of items is described, the present invention is not limited thereto. The preview may be set in units of "construction" of the program. Thereby, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the above-mentioned embodiment. (10) Screen display of interview decision form and so on. (10-1) Screen of interview decision form and so on is displayed on the service reservation input terminal 10 provided in the news program production support department 2. Enter the information about the interview news subject by the person in charge. The service reservation information of the service reservation of a reporter or a photographer is entered in a designated input field of the service reservation form, thereby creating the service reservation form. Next, the service reservation input terminal 10 converts the service reservation table into a service reservation file FW 'and stores it in the DB server 7 via the LAN 8. In fact, the schedule is displayed on the screen as shown in Figs. On this occasion, there were 3 interviewees (photographers) in the "Photography" business in April, 1996. From April 1, 1996 (Monday) until April 16 (Tuesday) Half month I I_ _____ _ I ------];-! N I.. IIT n II nni Λ ^ ν) — -ee ) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297 gong) -96- Printed by A7 · ___B7 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Is displayed on the screen. Specifically, as a service schedule for the three surnames "Yamada", "Narita", and "Ueshima", information such as "vacation", "early shift", "travel", and "late shift" are displayed every day . In addition, the equipment management terminal 1 1 A of the interview management terminal 1 1 provided in the news program production support department 2 is input to the interview management file FS provided by the person in charge via the LAN 8 from the branch office / branch office / club terminal 6 After reading out the equipment management information about the management status of the equipment such as the camera and the automobile used for the equipment transportation, visually confirm the content of the equipment management information and create an interview decision form. In addition, on the interview management terminal 11 1 and the interview scheduling terminal 1 1 B and the interview team terminal 1 1 C, input the interview management file FS provided by the person through the LAN 8 from the branch office / branch office / club terminal 6 and read it out. After the contents of the interview schedule information about various contents of the interview schedule are confirmed, the contents of the interview schedule information are visually confirmed, and an interview decision form is prepared. Next, the interview management terminal 11 (equipment reservation terminal 11A, interview reservation terminal 11B, and interview team member terminal 11C) completes the interview decision table based on the equipment management information and interview reservation information (hereinafter referred to as interview decision information). The interview decision table is converted into the interview management file FS, and then stored in the DB server 7 via the LAN 8. In fact, this interview decision form is shown on the opening screen as shown in Figure 4-8. In this case, out of the total of 24 registrations, there were 2 scheduled display items for interviews on April 14, 1996 (Sunday). The interview decision information for these 2 cases was displayed on the screen. Screen. Specifically, the paper size of the paper is suitable for financial affairs and household materials (CNS) A4; (21GX297 male G ~ (for the precautions on the back, please fill in this page)

, 1T printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative A7 B7 __V. Invention Description (95) is the first and second interview and decision information, which are composed of "Interview Items", "Contents", " "Interview location", "departure / return time", "on-site time", "journalist", "camera", "VE", "lighting", "work student" and "equipment" (this will be changed over time) Information). In this interview decision table, although the information about the changes in the time of "Photographer" and "Equipment" in the second interview decision information is empty, this shows that there are still time for "Photographer" and "Equipment" The change information is empty, which means that there are still photography equipment and equipment that have not been selected separately. When the blank part of each interview decision information in this interview decision form is filled, it is necessary to input a list of information about the temporal change of the blank part for the person in charge. Therefore, on the display screen of the interview decision table, a list of current time-lapse change information (hereinafter referred to as a candidate information group) superimposed and displayed on the time-lapse change information allocated to the blank section (hereinafter referred to as the candidate information group) This is called a highlight menu display.) For example, the interview decision table on April 14th (Sunday) on the interview day as shown in Fig. 48. The second interview decision information represents the "photographer" time-lapse information. The method of displaying the time-varying information in the empty column with a prominent menu is explained. ”First, as shown in Figure 4-7, the candidate information group in the service schedule as a" photographer "is shown in Figure 4-9. The general highlight is displayed on a part of the display screen of the interview decision table. In this candidate information group, three days before and after the interview day (April 14) of each photographer are displayed (but the last day of the month is fixed on the right when the end of the month is reached). (Notes for reading first and back #Fill this page) This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 public dream) -98- A7 B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs®; Industrial and consumer cooperation. ^ V. Description of the invention (96 ^ Enter the candidate, visually highlight the candidate information group that is prominently displayed on the display screen of the interview decision table. At the same time, the photographer's work day and the interview day are compared, and the photographers who can work The photographer ’s service time is compared with the interview time on the interview day, and the photographers who can participate in the interview on the interview day are selected. At this time, enter the name of the selected photographer among the candidate information group that will be displayed prominently. If you click the mouse to enter, the selected photographer name ("Narita" in the case of Figures 4 and 9) will be entered in the interview decision table, and the second interview decision information indicates the "photographer" change over time. The blank part of the '. (1 0 — 2) The action has the news program production support unit 2 of the service reservation input terminal 10 and the interview management terminal 11, and according to the instruction signal input by the input agent, it follows The processing program RTO shown in FIG. 5 performs processing, thereby displaying the interview decision table on the screen and completing the interview decision table, and then logging in to the DB server 7. In the case of this embodiment, in the case of news program production support The service schedule input terminal 10 and the interview management terminal 11 of the department 2 are screens for touch input by information input means such as a mouse. For the interview decision table displayed on the screen, input information is provided by a mouse. The designated command signal is inputted by means. In the processing program RTO shown in FIG. 50, the news program production support section 2 enters the processing procedure for creating the interview decision table from step SP 1 2 0. First, at step SP 1 21, the news Each in the program production support department 2 (Read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210 × 297 gong) according to the standard -99- Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Yinju

A7 F __B7 V. Description of the invention (97) After the terminal is set to the initial setting state by the input operation of the input person, the process moves to step SP122 and the interview decision table is displayed on the screen (Fig. 47). Next, it is determined at step SP1 2 3 whether or not the news program production support unit 2 has finished producing the interview decision table. When an affirmative result is obtained at step SP1 2 3, the news program production support section 2 directly moves to step SP1 2 5 and logs on to the DB server 7 because it is not instructed to end. On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained in step SP1 2 3, the representative is not instructed to end. In this case, the news program production support unit 2 moves to step 5 P 1 2 4 to determine whether the current candidate information group (for example, the photographer's service schedule) assigned to the empty time section is selected. . When an affirmative result is obtained at step SP 12 4, the news program production support unit 2 moves to step SP 1 2 6 to determine whether it is an interviewer (such as a photographer) who has been scheduled to enter the work schedule. From step SP 1 2 7, the candidate information group based on the schedule is prominently displayed on a part of the interview decision table (Figure 4-9). Thereafter, the news program production support unit 2 determines in step SP128 whether or not the input agent selects an interviewer (photographer) from the candidate information group based on the service schedule that can be interviewed at sunrise. When a negative answer is obtained at step SP1 2 8 in this step, return to step 1 2 8 and wait until the interviewer is selected. On the other hand, when a positive result is obtained in step s P 1 2 8, the process directly moves to step S 1 2 9 to determine whether the interview time on the interview day and the duty time of the interviewer are the same. This paper size is applicable to China National Standards and Standards (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X29 *? Public address) < Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Ding 100-A7 B7 Offical Consumer Cooperatives, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printing 5. Description of the invention (98) Then when a positive result is obtained at step s P 1 2 9 'News production support section 2 displays an error message (for example, "time repeat", etc.) in the designated field of the interview decision table, and then moves to Proceed to step SP 1 3 1 to remove the highlighted display displayed on the interview decision list from the screen. On the other hand, when a negative result is obtained in step SP1 2 9, the news program production support section 2 directly moves to step SP1 31 and the prominent display displayed on the interview decision table is deleted from the screen. Thereafter, the news program production support unit 2 moves to step SP 1 3 2 to eliminate the error message displayed on the acquisition / interview decision table, and then directly moves to step SP 1 3 3 to log in to the DB server 7 and return to step 1 again. SP 1 2 3 executes the processing procedure described above. However, when a negative result is obtained at step SP 1 2 6, the representative interviewer has no scheduled service, and the news program production support department 2 moves to step SP 1 34, as shown in FIG. 51. The candidate information group is displayed prominently in a part of the interview decision table. Next, the news program production support unit 2 determines in step SP1 3 5 whether the input performer selects the performer from the candidate information group of the representative performer. When a negative result is obtained at step SP1 3 5 in this step, return to step SP1 3 5 again and wait until the agent is selected. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step SP1 35, the process moves directly to step SP1 36, and the highlighted display displayed on the interview decision table is removed from the screen, and then the process proceeds to step SP132 to perform the same process as described above. In this way, for each interview decision information displayed in the interview decision table, the current candidate information group that will be assigned to the time-lapse information in the blank section (read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ (210X297) 犮 -101-Printed by A7 ^ __B7 printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. The description of the invention (99) is prominently displayed on a part of the interview decision form Can make the input person making the interview decision form based on the prominent display to select the interviewer who can be used during the interview or the equipment that can be used on the interview day. At the same time, if there is an interviewer when making the interview decision form, It is also easy for the input person to recognize the changed content if the service time of the user or the usage time of the equipment is changed. In addition, in the interview decision table, the current candidate information group assigned to the time-lapse information allocated in the empty column cannot ensure that the interview can be performed during the interview. The owner or the equipment that can be used on the interview day, etc. By displaying the other candidate information groups which are different from the candidate information group and which are assigned the time-varying information of the blank part as above, it is possible to ensure the temporary interview of the person in charge or the prepared equipment. Furthermore, the interviewer or equipment selected based on the prominent display has been selected to conduct another interview, and the interviewer's service time or the use time of the equipment and the scheduled interview are scheduled. When the time is repeated, a mark such as an “error message” is displayed in a designated field of the interview decision table, so that the input person can be automatically recognized when the selection is impossible. (1 0 — 3) Effect According to the above configuration, the interview decision information displayed on the interview decision table is displayed prominently in response to the needs of the current candidate information group assigned to the undecided temporal change information. The method of determining a part of the table in the interview, even if the content of the interview decision table is changed, the Chinese paper standard (CNS) A4 (210 > < 297) is applicable to this paper standard --- ------} ------ IT ------ ^). (Total 1 note, please fill in this page before filling in this page) -102- Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Indian disaster A7 〃 B7 V. Description of the invention (1〇ί) The situation is also because the changed content is displayed prominently, so you can avoid erroneous time-varying information being selected, and you can always deliver the latest information Information display methods to improve business efficiency. (10-4) Other embodiments are the same as those in the above embodiment, although they are directed to the field of applying the information display method to a news program production device 1 for producing a news program. Together, the present invention is not described. With this limitation, it can also be applied to program production methods for promoting various events or annual festivals. What is important is that it can be applied to the production of an interview decision form for a news agency such as a television station or a news agency to determine the scheduled interview content. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the current candidate information group assigned to the undetermined change over time is used as the second list for each act decision information (interview decision information) displayed on the first list (interview decision table). The case where it is displayed prominently will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a current candidate information group allocated to undecided time-varying information, it is not only a service reservation that displays the service status of a reporter or photographer, etc. Tables, and equipment reservation information that shows the use status of vehicles, cameras, etc., can also be widely used for other types of interviews, such as people or things. (1 1) Screen display of interview schedule (1 1 1 1) The screen of interview schedule is displayed on the interview management terminal located in the news program production support department 2 (read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) The paper size of the edition is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) 厶 心 哥格 (210 × 297 public dream) -103-Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (10j 1 1 Interview reservation terminal 1 1 B. As a reporter, the interview schedule information such as the event mid-year festival will be used as a news subject. After reading out the interview management file FS provided by the branch / branch / club club terminal via LAN8, enter the interview schedule information. The designated entry field of the interview schedule forms the interview schedule. As a reporter, use the interview schedule terminal 1 1 B of the interview management terminal 11 to change the content of this interview information or add a book to the interview management file. FS is updated and written, and this interview management file FS is stored in the DB server 7 via LAN 8. Actually, this interview schedule is displayed on the screen as shown in Fig. 52 On this screen, among all registrations, 1 2 9 3, the scheduled interview will be displayed within 1 week from April 14, 1996 (week) to April 20 (saturday). The number of items is five, so these five interview schedules are displayed on the screen of the camp. Specifically, the first to fifth interview schedules are “registered person”, “interview item”, "Content", "Interview Day", "Local Time", "Interview Location", "Contact Person" and other information. In addition, the front of each "registered person" shows whether the interview item is adopted "Acquisition" information. Furthermore, at the most marginal positions of the first to fifth interview schedule information, the "mid-year" information indicating that each interview schedule information is a mid-year festival. (1 1-2) The action is set Interview management terminal 11 in the news program production support department 2 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 Regulations (2 丨 0 X 297 public p (near the first to read the back and fill in this page)

, 1T, ^} ί · -104- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (10 $ interview scheduled terminal 1 1 B, according to the instruction signal entered by acting as a reporter, according to The processing program RTO as shown in Fig. 53 performs processing. "The interview schedule is displayed on the screen." The interview schedule is registered on the DB server 7. "In this embodiment, the interview schedule The terminal 1 1 B is provided with a screen that can be tapped by information input means such as a mouse. When the interview schedule is displayed on the screen, 'the designated command signal can be input by the information input means such as a mouse. The processing program RTO shown in Fig. 53. The interview scheduling terminal 1 1 B enters the processing procedure for making the interview schedule from step SP 1 40. First, at step SP141, the interview scheduling terminal 1 1 B operates through the input of the reporter. After being set to the initial setting state, the process moves to step SP 1 42 to display the interview schedule on the screen. Then, at step SP 14 3, the interview schedule terminal 1 1 B judges whether or not to end the production of the interview schedule. When a negative result is obtained at step SP 1 4 3, the interview booking terminal 1 1 B moves to step SP 1 4 4 to determine whether any of the plurality of interview scheduling information in the interview scheduling table is given "〇" in the "mid-year" information. On the other hand, when a positive result is obtained in step SP 1 4 3, the interview reservation terminal 1 1 B moves to step SP 1 4 5 to end the processing procedure. When a positive result is obtained in step SP 1 4 4 The interview scheduling terminal 1 1 B moves to step SP 1 46 to determine whether the date of the "interview date" of the interview scheduling information marked with "0" in the "mid-year" information is within the past year from today. Specifically, The paper size shown in Figure 52 is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297) (¾Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order-105- Staff Consumption of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative prints A7 B7 V. Invention Description (10¾ Interview Schedule Form, only the 5th Interview Schedule Information is marked with “0”, and the “1st to 4th Interview Schedule Information” information is not available. Be given When a positive result is obtained at step SP 1 4 6 in this step, the interview reservation terminal 1 1 B moves to step SP 1 47. After creating the interview interview information for the date of "interview day" plus one year, move to step SP 1 4 7 is registered in the DB server 7. Specifically, for the 5th interview schedule information (interview item: "Iiyama Sakura Festival") in the interview schedule table shown in Fig. 52, the "· Interview Day" information After adding 1 year to the date of NZD (change "96.04.14 ~ 96.04.2 1" to "97.04.14 ~ 97.04.21"), the interview schedule information is shown in section 5 4 As shown in the figure, a new interview schedule is created. ”On the other hand, when a negative result is obtained at step SP 1 4 6, because 尙 did not complete the festival during the year, the interview schedule terminal 1 1B directly moves to step SP. 1 48 Registered in DB server 7. In contrast, when a negative result is obtained at step SP 1 4 4, the interview booking terminal 1 1 B judges that the interview scheduling information is not given a “〇” mark, and then moves to step s P 1 4 9 to further the plurality of interview scheduling information. It is judged whether the "0" mark of the information in the middle of the year has disappeared. When a positive result is obtained at step SP 1 4 9 at this time, the interview reservation terminal 1 1 B moves to step SP 1 5 0 to determine the information at "mid year". Whether the "Interview Date" of the scheduled interview without the "○" mark is within the past year from the current date. When a positive result is obtained at step SP 1 50, the interview is scheduled for this paper. The paper size of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X25 > 7 meters) '-106-(Please read the precautions on the back of this page before filling in this page ) Order the Consumers' Cooperative Printing Association of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7-B7___ V. Invention Description (1〇) 4 1 1 B Move to step s P 1 5 1 After removing the interview schedule information from the interview schedule, move to step S P1 4 8 is registered in the DB server 7. Specifically, the item "Iiyama Cherry Blossom Festival" of the interview schedule shown in Fig. 54 is deleted from the interview schedule. On the other hand, when a negative result is obtained in step SP150, because 尙 has not released the designation of the business during the year, the scheduled interview terminal 1 1β directly moves to step SP148 and logs in to the DB server Ί. On the other hand, when a negative result is obtained in step SP1 49, the interview scheduling terminal 1 1B judges that the "mid-year" information is marked with "0" among the scheduled interview information, and then returns to step S P 1 4 3 implements the above-mentioned processing procedure again. In other words, if the time when the "mid-year" information is added with the "0" mark is earlier than the date of the "interview day" information or the last date of the period, the time when the "interview day" information passes. Or, after the last day of the period, add one year to the EA date of the "Interview Day" information of the interview schedule information, and then create this interview schedule information into a new interview schedule. The multiple interview schedule information of the interview schedule is performed at the same time every year, and the event or annual festival will be the target of the interview after next year. Designated to act in the middle of the year, the interview date can be automatically recorded each year; the date of the scheduled interview is postponed to the interview schedule. Tong Pei's Interim Designation column in the middle of the year is not specified in the Interim Period. The paper size of this paper applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297); --------- :. L ---- --ir ------ line '(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -107- Printed by A7., Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, ________B7 V. Description of the invention (1〇 ^ The scheduled information can be automatically deleted from the interview schedule after the next year. (1 1-3) Effect Based on the above structure, among the multiple scheduled interview information, only the next year and the same period each year The interview information that is the target of the interview is equivalent to the event or the annual festival. The ED date of the interview date is automatically postponed and updated every year as a new interview target. This saves the need to re-enter the same information every year. The trouble of the table can avoid forgetting the input and can improve the efficiency of information input. (1 1-4) Other embodiments are also in the above embodiment, which are displayed as a list (interview schedule) on the display screen. The first period in which the plural scheduled information shown is performed will be described for a period of one week from April 14, 1996 (Sunday) to April 20th (Saturday), but the present invention is not limited to This is the limit. In addition to the first week, the first period can be freely set to various periods such as 3 days, 2 weeks, and 1 month. "In addition to the above-mentioned embodiment, the schedule is based on the schedule (interview reservation information). The schedule information (that is, the "interview day" information) specified in the middle of the year (that is, marked with "〇" in the "mid-year" information) is postponed and updated after the second period (1 year) The case of the DB servo 7 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. As the second period, in addition to one year, it can also respond to the periodicity of the scheduled information. I --------- 1, ------ 1T ------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297K $) -108- Central Ministry of Economy Standards Bureau MS: Industrial and consumer cooperatives printed A7 · ___ B7 V. Description of invention (10 ^ since It is set to various periods such as 6 months or 2 years. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the case where such an information updating method is applied to a news program production and delivery device 1 for producing a news program is described, the present invention It is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use a program production device (not shown) for publicizing various events or annual events, or to plan an interview for a news agency other than a television station. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, as the scheduled operation information, the case where the scheduled event information such as the event or the mid-year event is applied, the interview location, and the scheduled interview information will be described, but the present invention does not take this as an example. However, as long as it is reservation information representing things performed on a determined date and time, it can also be applied to other kinds of reservation information. (1 2) Broadcast manuscript (12-1) Production of broadcast manuscript The broadcast manuscript is created by the reporter terminal 15 using the application software that broadcasts the manuscript to function for each "construction" (image subject) in each "project". As shown in FIG. 55, after the reporter terminal 15 is activated by a member of the news department (reporter), the initial setting screen 2 2 0 is displayed on the screen, and the schedule button 2 is displayed on the upper part of the initial setting screen 2 2 0. 2 1. Interview reservation button 222, interview group member button 223, original button 2 2 4 ~ pre-set button 2 2 8 etc. Among various menu buttons, the original member button 2 2 4 was selected by the member of the Ministry of Information, and then in the menu Button (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The size of the paper used for this edition applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297). -109- A7 B7 Printed by the Central Consumers Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Description of the invention < 1〇V 1 | The manuscript list 2 3 0 〇1 1 I is displayed on the reporter terminal 15 and the initial setting screen 2 2 0 is displayed on the lower part of the manuscript—view 1 I 2 3 0- Please read 1 2 and broadcast originals 1 1 2 3 2 〇 Read 1 1 1 Here, the interview originals 2 3 1 This is the first of the interviews with the local news department. 1 1 Of the interview manuscripts produced by the staff-view, broadcast manuscripts-view 2 3 2 Department i Beijing 1 | The interview manuscript produced by the editor and the members of the Ministry of Information and edited the interview item and then edit the manuscript. Of the final state of the broadcast manuscript 1 I List of materials 0 Page 1 List of interview manuscripts 2 3 1 Item column 2 3 1 A, divided into factories 1 1 Interview item hundred / title "2 3 4" Read Time J 2 3 5, Factory interview 1 1 Original ID ”2 3 6 and other information displayed in the list of broadcast originals Order I 2 3 2 Item column 2 3 2 A is also divided into" Item 100 Number / Broadcast item Ju 1 IJ 2 3 7, factory item time ”2 3 8,“ read time ”2 3 9, 1 1 1 Γ 0 A original ID” 2 4 0 and other items to display data, 1 1 涑) 1 However, When a member of the Ministry of Information interviews and produces a manuscript in the local area »It is displayed in the item list 2 3 1 of the interview manuscript list 2 3 1 A by moving the 1 | cursor to the desired Juruchang Elementary School Entrance Ceremony 氺 氺 氺 * J and touch 1 I, the reporter terminal 15 then opens each factory registered in Xiangbaichang Elementary School Entrance Ceremony 1 1 I 氺 氺 氺 氺 ”to make J for manuscripts The original production picture 1 1 surface 0 1 1 That is, the editor checks the interview original 1 1 created by the team member of the Ministry of Information, and the final version of the broadcast original is registered in the DB server 7 > only 1 I From the list of broadcast manuscripts displayed in the list of broadcast manuscripts 2 3 2 2 3 2 A 1 1 1 This paper size applies the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 format (210X29 * 7mm) -110 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau employee consumer cooperative printed A7 _ _ B7 _V. Invention description (10fe Move the cursor to the desired item, such as "Primary school entrance ceremony * * * *". At this time, the reporter's terminal 15 opens the original screen of the "Primary School Admission Ceremony * * * *" made by the members of the Ministry of Information on the screen. As shown in Figure 5-6, on this original production screen 2 4 5, the project number / project name is displayed on the display field 246 (number 1, "Primary School Admission Ceremony ****"), and the project time is displayed on the display field 247. The display is 50 "seconds", the program name "Midday News ****" is displayed in display column 248, and the display time of the original is read by the announcer's in the display column 249 item "Primary School Entrance Ceremony ***" Is 4 4 "seconds". In addition, the number of editions in the case where the broadcast original is edited, corrected, or changed and displayed in the display column 2 50 is displayed as "1" (in this case, it is "1", so it is printed again without being corrected or changed). Out). Next, at the reporter's terminal 15, the member of the news department moved the cursor to the subject matter input field 2 5 2 provided on the upper part of the manuscript input box 2 5 1 and clicked to read the program schedule information from the DB server 7 That is, the prominent menu 2 5 3 composed of the data of the program composition table is displayed in a window screen on the original input field 2 5 8 and will be registered in each "composition" of the item "elementary school entrance ceremony ****" Composition number 2 54, composition time 255, and subject matter marks 2 5 6 and 257 are displayed. The subject matter marks 2 5 6 and 2 5 7 are divided into "composition" video question materials, and are displayed with patterns or characters that are easy to distinguish the video content of each video subject matter, and also show the broadcast time. Here, the highlighted menu 2 5 3 can be moved freely by the mouse operation of the members of the Department of Public Information, and can be freely moved to a position that does not hinder the production of the original. This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS> Α4 specifications (2) 0X 297 gong) {Read the precautions on the back before filling this page)-Order 111-5 ητ 11 ftswf -3 丨 3 5 * SH 地 童il 5 Leaving the book 3 Searching for a business card—1 brother Shao Bin 刈 C3 doing sv§8 『X 2 3』 mHfm 2 β > Thin i private person f) Jufan is / 1 μφι3Λ_ · 3ω ο ο f 3 False Xue Λ 1 i Zhitun 1 s- 1 1 m3 u ^ n I o soul to > 3 Dizhong ii I si-^ ^ r ®2 e Τ-Ι ^ Λ: &

μ W SV

S 2 I is ^ 3 Aw ί, κ 0,, 18¾¾. Β ο 3 「2 V: Tf? Sifi 3 wi 1 " 商 狮 部 H i ο Jth noodles * steamed slightly $ 3 ^ s 5 Η \ 2 X § ii, s ^ 1 s I drop) N ugly disk BV o

2Q Takuya ^ s

olT $ s ^ rs ^ α ^ υ 响) to the complexion of the basic milk δι # ^, ϊ§ ^ 8ΙΛ ^^ η # -ι-38- 101north Shang Qian 5¾ — Sincere — · §ΕΛ Overturned 2 4 es-lnii thank — guanidi i'to4 y§JL · wrong — postal bank m2 β, 1 3 s 1 i Λ (Kouta® β ^ s I 3 1 we 4§i ^ I3 (\ 2: * 3 ^ :: he® dish borrowing 20: (WIth — 砟 Norwegian 2 i S 唞) Νΐ · Hui Jin 2 5 SF / P Mou W Youhui (S Θ w M-$ ^ i§3 ^ l8 (\ w (1 3 fwi v < I i 0 d0 -3 SJ / right "sj §Zan Ershi but] 2U1T fto · to Tiao Shi Keer t- i 3 wii nt Α7 Β'ο Ο 2 wp i, ΜΛ i 卬 y * 1 1 f dish * g Λ ms 3 Hong Kong dollar i heat transfer μ Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 * B7 _ V. Description of the invention (11¾ Easy to identify. In addition, the reporter terminal 1 5 For example, by inputting the Chinese character "full open" on line 8 of page 1/2 by a member of the press department, by touching the Zhuyin button 2 6 8 and adding a kana phonetic beside the "full open" Chinese character (as shown in the figure) (Pronounced MANNKAI) to make it easier to read. Furthermore, the original creation screen 24 5 has a delete function at the lower "F 1" key 2 5 1A, and has an "F 2" key 2 5 1 B. The "F4" key 251C has a moving function, the "F5" key 251D has a copy function, the "F7" key 251E has a restore function, and the "F 8" key 2 5 1 F has a registration function. That is, Members of the Department of Public Information can use the "F 1" key 2 5 1A to delete unnecessary articles when entering the manuscript, use the "F2j key 2 5 1 B" to insert necessary sentences into the article, and use the "F 4" key 2 5 1 C to specify Move the article to the desired place, use the "F 5" key 2 5 1 D to copy the article, use the "F7" key 251E to cancel the previous processing and return to the state of the previous step, use the "F8" key 25 1F to perform The process of registering the manuscript. On the other hand, if the team member of the Ministry of Information wants to check the number of characters and the reading time of the entire page of the manuscript entered in this way, move the cursor to the entire information button on the upper part of the display column 2 4 9 2 6 9 and click "With this, the reporter terminal 15 will display a pop-up menu (window screen) showing the information about the number of characters on the full page and the reading time as shown in Figure 5 7 2 6 9 Each page is provided on the original production screen 2 4 5 After confirming all the prominent menus 2 6 9 A, the members of the Ministry of Information determined that the paper size was applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS > Λ4 specification (210X297) __ n I i; n-. ^ 1 1- --n IIIITIII-nn-* (诮 Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) -114-Printed by A7 of Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs * ___B7___ V. Description of invention (if there is no error in nl, Close the highlighted menu 2 5 3 that was originally open on the original creation screen 2 4 5 and finally touch the login button 2 6 5. As a result, the reporter terminal 15 registers the inputted manuscript as a broadcast manuscript file OF on the DB server 7 via the LAN 8. In addition, when the reporter's terminal member 15 touched the print button 2 6 6 in the reporter's terminal, the broadcast original was printed based on the broadcast original file registered on the DB server 7. The broadcaster can confirm the printed originals of the broadcast original by marking 2 5 6 and 2 5 7 to confirm that the video theme of the broadcast is correct and read the broadcast: the original at the same time without error. Further, in the news program production and distribution device 1, on the manuscript production screen 2 4 5 of the reporter terminal 15, the subject mark of "composition" is corresponding to each of the manuscript input fields 2 1/2 8 and 2/2 pages 2 5 8 and After the original is input in the state of 2 6 1, there may be a case where the “composition” in the program composition table is changed by the sub internal input terminal 3 4. Even in such a case, the news program production and distribution device 1 constructs a network by registering the data of the broadcast original file OF and the program composition table produced by the reporter terminal 15 on the DB server 7 through the LAN 8 so that it can respond to the program The "composition" in the composition table is changed, and the composition time or the subject matter mark of each "composition" of each of the highlighted menus 2 5 3 displayed on the original creation screen 2 4 5 can also be changed in real time. In this way, the members of the Department of Public Information can enter the manuscript correctly according to the changed composition time in connection with the change of the program composition table. (12-2) Procedure for making broadcast manuscripts This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 regulation (210X 297 public power) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

-115- Printed by A7-B7 of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives. 5. Description of the invention (& Secondly, each "composition" of the items actually included in the program composition table is referred to by the explicit menu 2 5 3 The processing procedure for creating a broadcast document is described using the flowchart shown in Fig. 58. At the reporter terminal 15, the process starts from step SP 1 6 1 and moves to step SP 1 6 2. At step SP 1 6 2 Reporter terminal 1 5 The initial setting screen 2 2 (Fig. 5 5) is displayed on the screen by the application software for the production of the broadcast original by the operation of the team member of the Ministry of Information. At step SP 1 6 3, the reporter terminal 1 5 When the team member of the Ministry of Public Information touched the item "Elementary School Entrance Ceremony ****" from the list of interview originals 2'3 1 2 3 1 A, it switched from the initial setting screen 220 to the original production screen 245 (Fig. 56) The display moves to step SP 1 6 4 on the screen. At step SP 1 6 4, the reporter terminal 15 moves to the original production screen 2 4 5 and moves to other processing by the operation of the member of the press department to determine whether to end the original production screen. Deal with 2 4 5. Get affirmation here If yes, it is displayed that the production of the original document has been finished on the original production screen 2 4 5 and moved to another screen. At this time, it moves to step SP 1 6 5 and ends the process. In contrast, it gets negative at step SP 1 6 4 As a result, it means that the production of the original document is not finished on the original production screen 2 4 5. At this time, the process moves to step SP166. At step SP 1 6, the reporter terminal 15 determines that the original production screen 2 4 5 is 1/2 of the page. Whether the subject tag input field 2 5 2 was touched by a member of the Ministry of Information. If a negative result is obtained here, it represents the subject tag input field --------- i ------ subscribe ------ 4ΓΙ (Read the notes on the back of the poem before filling out this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) Λ «兄 格 （210X297 公 蝥） -116- Printed by the Beiya Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ A7 B7 2. Description of the invention (2 5 2 尙 Untouched. At this time, return to step SP 1 6 4 and repeat the process again. If a positive result is obtained at step SP 1 6 6 on the other hand, it represents the input field 2 for the mark with the composition. 5 2 has been touched by a member of the Department of Public Information, at this time moves to step SP167. 1 6 7. The reporter terminal 1 5 reads the highlighted menu 2 5 3 from the DB server 7 via LAN 8 and displays the highlighted menu 2 5 3 superimposed on the original input field 2 5 8 of the original production screen 2 4 5 Then, proceed to step SP 1 6 8. At step SP 1 6 8. When the reporter terminal 15 touches the desired subject mark 2 5 6 from the prominent menu 2 5 3 in the member of the press department, proceed to step S. P 1 6 9 is attached to the subject mark input field 2 5 2 and displays the subject mark 2 5 6. The cursor is moved in a state where the document can be input at a position where data of 1/2 page is input. At this time, the composition time is also displayed in the subject mark 2 5 6 so that the broadcaster can confirm the composition time without looking at the highlighted menu 2 5 3. At step SP 169, the reporter terminal 15 enters the manuscript on the 1/2 page by the member of the press department. Similarly, when the reporter terminal 15 touches the original mark input field 2 60 of the original production screen 2 4 5, the reporter terminal 15 displays the highlighted menu 2 5 3 superimposed on the original input field 2 6 1. If the theme mark 2 5 7 of the menu 2 5 3 is selected, the theme mark input field 2 6 0 will be attached to the theme mark 2 5 7 and the information on page 2/2 is entered. It is in a state where the original can be input. The mobile cursor 'is organized by the Ministry of Information. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 × 297 cm) I-I --- ------- I --- ,. L.: ---- nn-i TIII n I n -s " (Read the precautions on the back, and then fill out this page) -117- A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economy All manuscripts up to 2/2 pages. With this, the manuscript creation screen 245 allows the subject matter marks 2 5 6 and 2 5 7 to correspond to the respective manuscript input fields 2 5 8 and 2 6 1 which are separated from each "composition". The original is input under the condition of the original, so that the broadcast original that is easily read by the announcer who corresponds to the original and the subject tag is 1 to 1 is input. At step SP170, the reporter terminal 15 determines whether the login button 2 6 5 was touched by a member of the Ministry of Information. If a negative result is obtained here, it means that the login button 2 6 5 has not been touched, and then returns to step SP 1 7 0 Wait until the login button 2 6 5 is touched. In contrast, if a positive result is obtained at step SP 1 7 0, the representative has touched the login button 2 6 5 by a member of the Ministry of Information, and then moves to step SP 1 7 1 ° At step SP 1 7 1, the reporter terminal 15 uses the manuscript entered by the member of the news department as the broadcast manuscript 0 F and logs in to the DB server 7 through LAN 8 and returns to step SP 1 6 4. (12 — 3) Actions and effects Based on the above configuration, the news program production and delivery device 1 uses a reporter terminal 15 for inputting broadcast originals, a console terminal 18 that creates a program composition table, and a broadcast original or program composition table that is registered. All the DB servers 7 of the information are connected through LAN8 to build a network, and when the manuscript creation screen 2 4 5 of the reporter terminal 15 is used to create the broadcast manuscript read by the announcer, it will represent each "composition" composition. Time by The size of this paper applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 standard orange (210X297) (诮 Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) t \ L. Order_ —i · -118- Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs A7. B7________ printed by the consumer cooperative. V. Description of the invention (The subject matter marks 2 5 6 and 2 5 7 of the highlighted menu 2 5. 3 can be read from the DB server 7 and referenced. As a result, the reporter terminal 15 is used as a broadcast on the original production screen 2 4 5 by assigning a one-to-one correspondence between the "composition" mark representing the video subject matter of each "composition" and the manuscript input by the member of the press department. The document file OF can be registered in the DB server 7. That is, the reporter terminal 15 prints out the broadcast document registered in the DB server 7, and the broadcaster can confirm the subject mark displayed on the broadcast document and read the broadcast document aloud. In addition, when the news program production and delivery device 1 changes the broadcast time of the information about the program composition table such as "composition" by the operation of other terminals such as the sub-input terminal 34, it is also because of the information about the broadcast original and the program composition table. The data is connected via LAN8. Therefore, the broadcast time of the "composition" described in the pop-up menu 2 5 3 referenced when the original is shown can also be changed in real time. In this way, the members of the Department of Public Information can continue to obtain accurate information on the original production screen 2 4 5 and can produce the correct broadcast originals that match each "composition". According to the above configuration, the news program production and distribution device 1 transmits the reporter terminal 15 for inputting the original manuscript, the console terminal 18 for producing the program composition table, and the DB server 7 registered with the information about the broadcasting manuscript or the program composition table through the LAN 8 Connect and build a network so that the materials can be contacted separately. The members of the Ministry of Information can refer to the highlighted menu 2 5 3 read from the DB server 7 on the original production screen 2 4 5 Originals. This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297). (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

、 1T -119- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives ^ A7 * _____B7 _V. Description of the Invention (^ (12-4) Other embodiments are in the above embodiments, although they will be screened for reporter terminal 15 The manuscript is printed, and the announcer is required to explain the occasion when the broadcast manuscript is read aloud, but the present invention is not limited to this. The broadcaster presets the display screen on the broadcaster's broadcast station, so that the broadcaster looks at the displayed The method of displaying the original document on this display screen is also possible. In addition, in the above embodiment, the case where the original document is produced using the reporter terminal 15 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A terminal having application software for making a broadcast original can also make a broadcast original on the console terminal 18 or any other terminal. In this case, the same effect as that of the above embodiment can also be obtained. (1 3) 〇 A (Broadcasting: On Air) Ruler display (1 3 — 1) The video data using 0A ruler is included in the news program production and sending device 1. The members of the Ministry of Information use the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 "Project" information of the subject matter (item name, subject matter name, 0A ruler, progress status, ID number, etc.) is read from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server controller terminal 9 and will be read by the linear editing machine 20 The edited video tape is mounted on VTR 21, and the video data is played in response to the name of the video subject matter read out. The subject name (title) and the video data are associated with each other on a 1-to-1 basis and recorded in the broadcast server unit 2 2 (hard disk). Here, as shown in Figure 5-9, the video tape specifications included in the broadcast server section 2 2 have been determined. The starting point of the program and (Please read the first Note: Please write this page again.) The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X 297 gong) -120- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, A7-___B7. The data area segmented at the end of the timetable is recorded with the time and time of the broadcast image time, and this data area is set to 0A rule. The previous movie (front cut) set before this 0A rule is Straight from the start of recording The data area up to the start point of the schedule in "XX" seconds, and the discarded video set at 0A rule is the data area from the end of the schedule to the end of the recording in "YY" seconds. Also in the previous video From the beginning of recording to the point of CueUp, the coloring bar signal or text information is recorded. The point of CueUp is set to “Z” seconds (usually 1 second) before the start of the timetable and will be recorded on the video tape. When the video starts to play, it is set in such a way that the broadcast image becomes stable before reaching the start point of the schedule. Then the abandoned part of the schedule image data that is played when the playback time is prepared to be extended for some reason is usually discarded, usually It has a margin of about 15 to 20 seconds and is pre-recorded in the broadcast server section 2 2 »That is, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 is a member of the press department who edits the edited video tape to be included塡 In VTR 2 1 As long as the P GM start point is found in advance, because the recording start point is determined in advance, the broadcast will start from the position “XX” seconds before the start point of the schedule The image data included in the broadcast hard disk servo unit 22, and by stopping the operation of the Department and member of the group at the end of the collection of end points included. At this time, the range of image data from the recording start point to the recording end point is called the recording rule, and it is displayed as a time code on the recording screen of the broadcasting server management terminal 25. Secondly, as shown in FIG. 60, the broadcasting server Management terminal 2 5 Use of this paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 gong) {Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order-121- A7 B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumption cooperatives printed five. Description of the invention (◦A ruler and recording ruler and other time information will display the recording screen 2 70 on the screen by the application software for recording. This recording screen 2 7 0 is available at the top. A screen operation subgroup operated on a screen, the screen operation subgroup includes a recording button 2 7 1, a submit button 2 7 2, a consistent button 2 7 3, a theme management button 2 7 4, and a pre-setting button 2 7 5 If you press the recording button 2 71 from the various menu buttons, a member of the Ministry of Information will touch the recording button 2 7 1 (item name, subject name, OA rule, Exhibition status, ID number, etc.) are displayed as a list. Actually, when the broadcast server management terminal 25 touches the program theme button 2 7 8 on the recording screen 2 70 when the members of the Ministry of Information, it will be the closest from the current time. The program scheduled to be played at the time (in this case, "Wrap Up Today" is displayed on the program display section 2 7 6, and the scheduled date and time display section 27 7 is displayed "April 16 (Tuesday) 18: 00: 00 ~ 18: 25: 00 ") The information about the subject matter of each item (item name, subject matter name, 0A ruler, progress status, ID number, etc.) is displayed on the news movie subject matter display section 281. Here, the combined subject matter The button 2 7 9 is used to select a combination of video materials to be included in the broadcast server unit 22 in advance. The general-purpose button 2 8 0 is used to pre-record video materials with frequent broadcast opportunities. The buttons in the case of the servo unit 22 will be described in the case of the present embodiment only when the program theme button 2 7 8 is selected. The news movie theme display unit 2 81 is divided into "item number / item name" "Column 282," Composition Number / Subject Name "column 283," (Neighbor first read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) —] tJi · The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 公 #) • 122- Indian slaves of the shelling consumer cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _ _B7 ____ V. Description of the invention (12b 0A ruler) column 284, “Paint” column 285, “Receiving ruler” column 286, “Progress” column 287, The "Division" column 288, the "Consistent" column 289, and the "ID number" column 290 respectively display various information. Press server display terminal 270 on the recording screen 270 of the news and film subject display section 2 8 1 The team member of the press department touches the name of the video subject (for example, item number "1", item name "headline J, composition number" "1" and the theme name "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban"), all the horizontal columns of the tapped video theme name are displayed in red. In this state, if the team member of the Ministry of Information touches the recording button 2 9 1, the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 will display the highlighted source menu superimposed on the recording screen from the DB server 7 and read through the LAN 8 2 7 0 上 "As shown in Figure 61, the source selection expanded in the state superimposed on the recording screen 2 7 0 is the highlighted menu 3 0 0, which will be connected to the VTR21 (in this case there are 2 Stations) are displayed as "Vl" & "V2j", and plural telephone lines for taking in video themes from outside the television station are displayed as "R1" to "R4". The members of the Department of Public Information installed the video tape edited with the linear editing machine 20 on the video player V 1 in advance, so the selection of the supply source selection highlights the first video player "V 1" on the explicit menu 3 0 0. Touch the button 3 0 1. With this, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 closes the source selection and highlights the menu 3 0 0 at the same time, so that the selected image question can be confirmed (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 enthalpy) -123- The Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs only prints A7 ·, B7 five 'invention descriptions (^ wood ("Sagami River fish fishing ban") The recording status is displayed in the status display section 2 9 2 provided in the lower part of the news and film theme display section 2 81. That is, the source selection highlights the cancel button 3 0 2 of the explicit menu 3 0 2 series. It is for users who want to stop recording and close the supply source to select the explicit menu 3 0 0. In addition, the broadcast server management terminal 25 can also be accessed from VTR 2 1 (VI and V2) and through telephone lines from outside the TV station (R1 ~ R 4) The captured video materials are collected in parallel at the same time, and the respective display statuses are displayed on the status display section 2 9 2 and the status display is 2 9 3 to 2 9 9. In addition, it is set to the right of the recording screen 2 7 0 Lower message bar 2 7 0M For example, the VTR 2 1 specified during recording is not connected to the broadcast server unit 2 2, and the situation where recording cannot be performed is displayed as error information. Actually, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), for example, On the recording screen, the status of 2 7 0 displays 2 9 3, and the status before the execution button 3 0 1 of the highlighted menu 3 0 0 is tapped by the member of the press department to display the status before the various operation buttons B TN are added. As shown in Figure 62 (B), in the status display 2 9 3, a member of the Ministry of Information touches the execution button 3 0 of the source selection highlight menu 3 0 1 In the display column 3 0 3, the recording line number of "Inclusion 1" is displayed. In the time code column 3 0 4 the time of the recording rule counted from this time is displayed. The paper scale is applicable to the China National Standards (CNS) core (210X297A potential ) (1A first read the back of the note #Fill this page) Order-line >! -124- A7 B7 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Industrial Cooperatives Co., Ltd. printed five inventions' 12 ^ 1 1 yard factory 0 0: 0 0: 0 0: 0 0 J 9 at the same time in the OA ruler 3 0 5 1 1. Material 0 A ruler factory 0 0 1 0 j 0 1 1 In addition, the status display 2 0 3 is displayed in the subject name column 3 0 6, "phase 1 1 Mochikawa fish fishing lifted the banned name of the subject matter of the video J for inclusion processing news Read 1 1 The team members can know the name of the video subject in the collection. On the back of the time code, 1 1 column 3 0 4 and 0 A ruler column 3 0 5 are provided with a rectangular stamp on the left side. Event 1 1 box 3 0 7 is displayed in red. ih. 1 1 o'clock 0 A feet of the first clip of the schedule start point (first cut): Shadow 1 image is displayed by i * K * 乂 I is shown as a stamp (Figure 5 9) 〇 Η 1 1 I at At the bottom of the status display 2 9 3, there is a message bar 3 0 8 showing 1 1 plant V 1 theme ST — BY J 〇 By this, the members of the Ministry of Information can recognize the sab identification 1 1 as the first plant in VTR 2 1 The recorder V 1 ”is in the recording preparation order 1 ii. Even in this case, because the recording has not started, in all operations 1 1 I The button BTN is covered with a mask to maintain the inoperable state. 1 1 Next, as shown in Figure 6 2 (C), the status of the first recorder V 1 of the factory is displayed as τ 2 9 3, V R R 2 1 ”. The end of the preparation of the 1 1 words, Baidong began recordingThe display of the message bar 3 0 8 changes to "J from I recorded in V 1. In this case, the time code in the time code column 3 0 4 starts to count as the time at 1 1 when the timetable start point is reached. 〇A ruler 3 0 5 値Toward time 1 1 The end point of the table starts from ^ 0 0 1 0 J to "0 0: 0 9" Factory 1 1 0 0: 0 8 "Factory 0 0 • 0 0 J The counting result is counted down 1 j Display 0 1 I draw a stamp at this time 3 0 7 is in the frame of the broadcast server 1 1 1 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 OX297 male: ^) -125-Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau of Standardization and Consumer Products Co., Ltd. A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (12 each 2 2 2) The first paragraph of the video image is displayed as a stamp and the frame is displayed in red. The team members can easily recognize that "the first video player V 1" is currently being recorded by confirming the status display section 2 9 3 '. At this time, the broadcast server management terminal 25 displays "in progress" on the "progress" block 287 (Fig. 60) of the news movie theme display section 281, and also displays and is displayed on the stamp picture in the "paint" block 285 The first video of the 3 0 7 execution frame has the same stamp. Here, at the broadcast server management terminal 25, the recording of the broadcast server section 2 2 is automatically started at the same time as the playback action of the VTR 2 1 '. (YY seconds) After the recording end point, the system is set up by stopping the operation of the members of the news department to end the recording. In other words, when the broadcast server management terminal 25 has a sharp change in the information of the program schedule (the information of the program composition table), it is necessary to shorten the recording time earlier by ending the recording. The team member stopped the operation and changed the recording end point. That is, the various operation buttons BTN (Fig. 62) are masked except for the stop button 3 0 9 and the end button 3 1 0 necessary for operation, and only the stop button 3 9 and the end button 3 1 0 is operational. In short, the members of the Department of Public Information want to end the recording earlier than the OA ruler, as long as they click the stop button 309. In this case, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 when the stop button

This paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A Xinyou Orange (210X297 male fT (read the precautions on the back to read #fill out this page) Order -Ψ -126- Printed by A7 of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy B7 V. Description of the invention (12) 4 3 0 9 When touched, stop playing according to “TRV 1” of VTR2 1 and the recording by the broadcast server unit 2 2 and put the “Progress” column 2 8 The display of 7 is changed to "Already Recorded" and the actual recording time is displayed in the "Recording Rule" column in seconds. 2 8 6. In addition, if the members of the News Department want to stop during the recording, just click the terminal button 3 10 is enough. In this case, the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 opens the recording stop highlighting menu 3 1 1 on the recording screen 2 7 0 as shown in FIG. 6 3. That is, ', the broadcasting server When the management terminal 25 touches the execution button 3 1 2 by the team member of the Ministry of Information, it will stop the playback according to the "first recording player V 1" of VTR 21 and the recording by the broadcasting server unit 22, and close the file. At this time; The "Progress" column 287 of the news movie theme display section 2 1 becomes "Unlisted" , The ID number in the "ID number" column 290 disappears, and the status display 2 9 3 also returns to the empty column state. In addition, if the cancel button 313 is clicked when the recording is stopped, the recording will not be stopped but the recording will be closed. 311. As shown in FIG. 63 (D), the broadcast server management terminal 25 emits a warning sound when the OA of the OA ruler 3 0 5 of the status display 2 9 3 becomes “0 0: 0: 0 0”. , And inform the team members of the Ministry of Information about the recording and ending of the OA footage, and then start recording the discarded video. At this time, the OA rule column 3 0 5 will display the video time of the discarded video in a negative way. For example, “― 〇〇: 〇1”, “— 〇〇: 02”, “~ 〇〇: 〇3” ~ “― 〇〇: 30” (end point of recording) ° This paper standard applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A Heart Brother (210X297) '' -127- --------- > -------- Order ------- Line-― (For the first reading _ Note on the back one Dan fills this page) Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 * ____B7 V. Description of the invention (12¾ In other words, 'The members of the Ministry of Information are at 0A feet When the number of discarded videos of 3 0 5 is "one 00:30" (the end point of recording), touch the stop button 3 0 9. With this, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 ends the recording and displays the news and film theme display unit. 2 8 1 "Progress" column 2 8 7 is changed to "Already included" and the recording ruler is displayed in seconds in the "Recording ruler" column 286. As shown in Figure 63 (E), it is displayed in the status 29 3 If the recording is stopped by the team member of the Ministry of Information until the video of the movie is discarded, the time code 'column 3 0 4' is displayed as the recording time, and the OA ruler 305 is displayed '10. 〇: 3〇j. Based on this, the members of the Department of Public Information recognized the discarded video data as containing 30 "seconds". In addition, the display content of the message bar 308 is changed to "V 1 is already recorded", and the execution frame of the stamp 307 is also displayed in red. (1 3 — 2) Recording procedure of image data using OA ruler. Secondly, in the broadcast server management terminal 25, each video subject matter of each item is recorded in the broadcast server section 22. The flowcharts in Figures 6 and 6 and 5 will be described. In the broadcasting server management terminal 25, enter from the beginning step of Step SP1 81 and move to step SP182. In step SP 1 8 2, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 performs initial settings for displaying the recording screen 270 from the DB server 7 through the application software through LAN 8 to step SP183 »In step SP 1 8 3, Broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 Applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) with new paper standard Λ 心 见 掊 (210X297 公 #} (Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order -128- Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the local shellfish consumer cooperative 1 ^ · A7 * _ B7 _ V. Description of the invention (12 & The team member of the news department touched the recording button 2 7 1 and displayed the recording screen 2 7 0 on the screen and moved to step S P1 8 4. At step SP 1 84, the broadcast server management terminal 25 determines whether the end of the recording screen 2 70 is instructed by a member of the Ministry of Information. If a positive result is obtained here, it means that the recording of the recording screen 2 70 has ended and Move to other processing screens, and then move to step SP 1 8 5 to end the recording process. For this, if you get a negative result at step SP 1 8 4, it means that the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 is designated by the team member of the Ministry of Information Video The image data is not included in the broadcast server section 22 at this time, and then moves to step SP186. At step SP 1 8 6, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 selects the subject matter of the video to be recorded by the team member of the news department, and determines the record button 2 9 1 Whether it has been touched. If a negative result is obtained here, it represents the selection of the subject matter of the image to be included and the recording button 2 9 1 尙 Untouched, at this time, return to step SP 1 8 4 until the recording instruction is indicated. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained in step SP 1 86, the representative image material to be recorded is selected and the recording button 2 91 is touched. At this time, the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP 1 8 7. 'At step SP 1 8 7, the broadcast server management terminal 25 instructs the selected video subject matter to be recorded in the broadcast server section 22, and the instructed situation is registered in the DB server 7 through LAN 8 and Update the information. In step SP 1 8 8, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 is used as the access device to perform the designated "first recording player Vi" of the VTR 2 1 and the preparation for recording is performed in the broadcasting server section 22. Issued instructions and this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 cm)--129- (For reading first (& note before filling out this page), \ 5 Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives A7 B? V. Description of the invention (12) Move to step SP189. At step SP 1 8 9, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 is "the first video recorder VI" of VTR 21 and the broadcast server. The department 22 prepares for recording, and at the same time, displays the status of preparation for recording in the status display 2 9 3 in the message bar 3 0 8 "V 1 theme ST-BY" (Figure 62 (B)), via LAN 8 Log in to the DB Word Server 7 and update the information. At step SP190, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 determines whether the recording preparation of the "first recording player V1" of the VTR2 1 and the broadcasting server section 22 have been completed. If a negative result is obtained here, it is indicated that V T R 2 1 is not connected properly, for example, it is impossible to prepare for recording for some reason. At this time, the process moves to step SP 1 9 1. At step SP1 91, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 displays the message bar 2 7 0λ on the screen 2 7 0 of the recording screen, and displays the reason that the recording cannot be prepared. As an error message, it moves to step SP192. At step SP1 92, the broadcast server management terminal 25 logs in the error message to DB server 7 via L A N 8 to update the data, and repeats the processing from step SP1 84 again. On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained at step SP1 9 0, it indicates that the recording preparation for the "first recording player V1" of VTR2 1 and the broadcast server section 22 has been completed, and at this time moves to step SP1 9 3. At step SP193, the broadcast server management terminal 25 has completed the preparation for recording, so the error message is displayed in the message box 2 7 0 of the recording screen 2 7 0 M. The error message is removed. National Standards (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 public power) ---------- "------ 1T ------ 0 {To read the precautions on the back, please fill in this page ) -130- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (12i step SP 1 9 4. At step SP194, the broadcast server management terminal 25 will display the video of the video theme specified by the team member The data is collected from the instructions of the broadcasting server unit 2 and sent to the server control terminal 2 3 and the linear editing machine 20 and moves to step SP195 »At step SP195 'The broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 will specify the image data of the specified subject matter. On. It was initially recorded in the broadcast server department 22, and at the same time, the status bar 2 9 3 displayed in the message bar 308, "Included from VI." It was registered on the DB server 7 via LAN8 to update the data. 2 8 1 `` Progress '' column 2 8 7 Changed from "Unrecorded" to "Recording j" and moves to step SP196. At step s P 1 9 6, the broadcast server control terminal 2 5 determines whether the stop of the status display 2 9 3 is touched by a member of the Ministry of Information. 3 0 9 ° If a negative result is obtained here, the representative of the Ministry of Information has not touched the stop button 3 0 9 at this time, and the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 moves to step SP 1 9 7 ° At step SP 1 9 7, the broadcast The server management terminal 2 5 displays the status of the OA ruler 3 0 5 in the status display 2 9 3 when the collection of the image data reaches the start point of the timetable, and displays the counting result of the countdown in intervals of 1 second in sequence until it becomes a discarded video. The image data at the end of the recording is displayed continuously and moves to step SP 1 98. At step SP 1 98, the broadcast server management terminal 25 will count down from the number of 0A feet in seconds. The counting results are displayed in sequence on the 0A ruler column 3 0 5 and registered to the DB servo via LAN8. The paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 cm) (" Read the precautions on the back first # fill this Page) ί -131-Ministry of Economy The Central Bureau of Standards only prints A7 for consumer cooperatives * __. _ __B7___ V. Description of the invention (12 ^ Machine 7 to update the data, move to step SP199. At step SP 1 9 9, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 determines the countdown Check whether the time frame 0A rule bar 305 is "0". If a positive result is obtained here, the time frame representing OA rule bar 305 is "0", and at this time, the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP200. At step SP 2 OO0, the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves the OA ruler 3 0 5 to "0", and notifies the members of the Ministry of Information by issuing a warning sound to step SP 2 0 2 » On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained in step SP 1 9, the 代表 representing the OA ruler 3 0 5 does not become "0 j and is tied to the countdown. At this time, the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP 2 0 1. At step SP 2 01, the broadcast server management terminal 25 determines whether or not 値 in the OA ruler 305 is "positive". If a positive result is obtained here, the 値 on the OA ruler column 305 is "positive", that is, the image data of the OA ruler is included in the recording. At this time, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 returns to step SP 1 9 6 to repeat. The above processing. On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained at step SP 2 01, the 値 in the OA ruler 305 is "negative", that is, the 値 in the OA ruler 305 becomes a negative 値 display, which means that the image data of the discarded movie is being recorded. At this time, the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP202. At step SP 2 02, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 displays the counting result of the OA ruler 3 0 5 in red, and simultaneously records the status of the discarded video image data being recorded in the DB server through LAN 8 7. Update the data and return to step SP196. --------------- Order ------ Line (Notes on the back of the first tabulation #Fill this page) This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) 6-4 regulations格 （2 丨 OX29? Public Card） -132- Printed by Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ A7 · B7 V. Description of the invention (at step SP 1 9 6, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 is abandoning During the recording of all the video data of the movie, if the member of the Ministry of Information touches the stop button 3 0 9, an instruction to end the recording will be issued to the broadcasting server section 22. At this time, the process moves to step SP 20 3. At step SP 2 0 3, the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 will log in to the DB server 7 through LAN 8 to update the data, and return to step SP 1 8 4. At step SP 1 8 4, the broadcasting server management The terminal 2 5 has been included in the video server 2 2 by the team member of the Ministry of Information. Therefore, the processing of the recording screen 2 70 is terminated, and the process moves to step SP 1 8 5 to complete the recording processing. (13 — 3) The operation and effect are as above, news program production and distribution device 1 On the screen of the broadcasting server management terminal 25, information (item name, theme name, OA ruler, progress status, and ID number) related to each video theme constituting the "project" of the program is transferred from the DB through the broadcasting server controller terminal 9 The servo 7 reads it out and displays it on the recording screen 2 70. In the broadcast server management terminal 25, a member of the Ministry of Information specifies the video theme of the item to be recorded on the recording screen 2 70, and the control is performed through the servo. The terminal 23 and the machine control section 24 prepare for recording in the broadcast server section 22, and at the same time, the video tape edited by the linear editing machine 20 is mounted on the VTR 21 to prepare the playback of the specified video material of the specified video theme. If all preparations are finished, in the Broadcasting Server Department 2 2 _________ ') I _ II i I Ding—— IIII Spring I (Counting the precautions before reading and then filling this page) This paper standard applies to China Standard (CNS) grid (210X29 ·? Public waste) -133- Printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards A7 · B7 _V. Invention Description (13: j started recording. At this time, the broadcast server The management terminal 25 displays the 0A ruler in the status display 2 9 3 and displays the 0A ruler in a countdown manner. "When the count result becomes" 〇〇: 〇〇 ", you can issue a warning sound to the news. The team member notified that the recording of the video data of the OA scale has ended. 0φ Next, the broadcast server management terminal 25 displays the video data of the discarded video in the status bar 2 0 5 in order to display 2 9 3 in the status. The countdown displays "-00:01", "one 00: 02" to "one 00: YY", and waits for a stop instruction from the members of the Ministry of Information. After the members of the Ministry of Information heard the warning sound and confirmed that the recording of the OA scale's video data has ended, by referring to the negative countdown display of the OA scale column 3 9 5 at the same time, touch the stop button at the desired timing 3 0 9 Therefore, it is possible to accurately record only the required recording time of the video material designated by the broadcast server management terminal in the broadcast server section 22. In addition, the news program production and delivery device 1 issues a warning sound when the counting result of the OA ruler is "0 0: 0 0" by displaying the status on the recording screen 2 7 0 on the broadcast server management terminal 2 5. It can prevent the team members of the Ministry of Information from missing the number of OA rulers from becoming "0 0: 0 0" in the collection of video data, making monitoring unnecessary. Due to the warning sound, attention should be paid to the operation of stopping the recording. Note, just send it to the recording screen 2 7 0, you can make the stop operation timing will not be I II______I) ______ ding _____ —Quan, 1 (Please read the precautions on the back and fill in this page first) This paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 «L will (210X297 Gong > -134- A7 B7 Printed by the Shell Standard Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (13) An error occurred and the operation was stopped at the end of the recording 》 In addition, the news program production and delivery device 1 connects the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 and the DB server 7 through LAN 8 to build a network, and thereby uses the status display 2 9 3 to perform the recording operation. If "Recording" becomes "Already Recorded", the information is registered in the DB server 7 via LAN8 to update the data, and the "Progress" column 2 8 7 of the news movie theme display section 2 8 1 will be displayed in real time and automatically switched. The correct and up-to-date recording status can always be displayed on the screen 2 70. With this, the members of the Xinwen department can correctly recognize the recording status of the video theme specified by the displayed information. If According to the above structure, the news program production and delivery device 1 displays information on each video subject matter of the "item" read out from the DB server 7 on the screen of the broadcast server management terminal 25, and will be designated by the members of the Ministry of Information. The video material of the video theme is started to be included in the broadcast server unit 2 and the countdown of the Ο A rule and the countdown of the discarded movie are counted at the same time, and the count result is displayed on the recording screen 2 7 0 and the status display 2 9 3 0A ruler bar 3 0 5, the members of the Ministry of Information can confirm the countdown display of 0A ruler bar 3 0 5 to calculate the time to stop recording and at the same time touch the stop button 3 0 9 so you can (13-4) Other embodiments are the same as the above embodiments, although they are directed to the broadcast server management terminal 25, and count down at 0A rule column 3 0 5 The display becomes "0 〇: This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) 8 4 grid (210X297) --------- ^) ----------------- line · ^ {Please read the precautions on the back of the book before filling out this page) -135- Printed by A7 *, __B7 of the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. When the description of the invention (13g 0 0) issued a warning and was notified Explanation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the stop button 309 may be blinked and notified, and other methods may be used to notify that the input of 0A image data has been completed. Also in this case, the same effects as those of the above-mentioned embodiment can be obtained. In addition, in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is for the case where the broadcasting server management terminal 25 performs the so-called manual operation of stopping the recording of the designated video subject matter by a member of the press department by touching the stop button 3 09. Explained, but the present invention is not limited to this, the stop operation can also set the system in a way that the specified recording stop point ends automatically. In this case, the team member of the Ministry of Information only needs to confirm the status display of the recording screen 2 70. 2 9 3 to 2 9 9 is sufficient, and the recording end time can be freely controlled by arbitrarily setting the recording end point as necessary. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, it is for the case where the broadcasting server management terminal 25 counts down the 栏 of the 0A rule column 305 in the recording until "00: 0 0", and displays the 弃 of the discarded movie as a negative 値Although the present invention is not limited to this, the method of displaying the last countdown of the discarded movie until it becomes "00:00", and a method of issuing a warning sound at the time when the recording of the OA-size image is ended may be used. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the description is given of the case where the video server is used to record the video data, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as it can be recorded using time information such as OA rulers. If you use application software, for example, you can use the console terminal 18 or other terminals to collect image data. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the paper server is used to manage the paper size, the Chinese National Standard (CNS) 梠 (210X 297 male H '-136-(read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7-B7 V. Description of the invention (13) Terminal 2 5 contains the video subject matter The data and sound data are added for explanation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the sound data can be recorded. This way, it can also be applied to the radio program (Credit) writing ( 1 4 1 1) The composition of the news subject production management section is given the same symbol as the part corresponding to the first figure. There is a presentation server section 2. Here, the presentation server section 22 is provided with a presentation server 2 2A, a first electric head writing device 22B, and a second electric head writing device 22C. As a control of the presenting server section 2 The control unit of 2 is provided with a broadcast server management terminal 25. Here, the broadcast server management terminal 25 is provided with a terminal body (not shown), which controls various application software for the production and management of news subjects. In this terminal body, A screen (not shown) is provided to display information input from the terminal body. In addition, a keyboard and a mouse are provided on the terminal body, and a member of the news department can input the required information by operating the keyboard or mouse. The broadcasting server management terminal 25 starts the application software for news subject production management, and reads the program information C1 of the program schedule from the DB server 7 through LAN8, so that the program data C1 according to the program schedule will be included The screen is displayed on the screen. The broadcast server management terminal 25 in this case operates the keyboard or mouse with the team member of the Ministry of Information to input the required information, and generates a news question based on the input. The video / sound data SV 0 ’s broadcast server collects the instruction data, and this is used as the recording instruction data D 1 through LAN8. The national standard (CNS) Λ4 坭 枋 (2 丨 0X297) is applicable to the paper size. --.- I In-. I! I 1 ^ 1, I--l-.y, -II II 1 ^ 1 ---- mmni ^ il— n (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page ) -137-Printed A7 ^ __ B7 printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Explanation of the invention (13 & server control terminal 23 and DB server 7 sent out. The DB server 7 stores the recording instruction data D 1 as the recording status data of the video / audio data S V 〇. Here, the D B servo 7 is previously registered with the text data P 1, and the text is displayed on the display screen of the screen 321 (shown in FIG. 67) of the broadcast server management terminal 25. On the other hand, the servo control terminal 2 3 generates machine control data DS 1 according to the recording instruction data D 1 and sends it to the machine control section 2 4 to control the machine control section 2 4. At the same time, the text corresponding to the recording instruction data D 1 The data P 1 is read from the DB servo 7 through the LAN 8, and this is sent as the first electric head data CL 1 1 to the first electric head writing device 2 2 B through the machine control section 2 4. Next, the machine control unit 24 generates a VTR control signal SM1 according to the machine control data DS1, a first electric head writing device control signal SM2, and a broadcast server control signal SM3, and sends the VTR control signal SM1 to VTR2 1, Control the VTR21, send the first electric head writing device control signal SM2 to the first electric head writing device 22B, control the first electric head writing device 22B, and send the broadcasting server control signal SM3 to the broadcasting servo 2 2 A, which controls the projection server 2 2 A. That is to say, there is a first video recorder VI and a second video recorder V 2 on VTR 21, and the members of the Ministry of Information put video tapes in either of them. Here, for example, a video cassette is put in the video recorder V 1. Another Ding 112 1 uses a linear editor 2 1 (shown in Figure 1) to make this paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 cm). Order --- (read the first reading on the back Note: Please fill in this page again) -138- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (playing video / audio data from a series of news subject video clips in accordance with the VTR control signal SM1 SV 0 is sent to the first electric head writing device 2 2 B. The first electric head writing device 2 2 B is added to the designated part of the video / audio data SV 0 in accordance with the first electric head writing device control signal SM2. The first electric head data CL 1 is included in the video server 2 2A in the form of the video / audio data SV2 to which the first electric head data is added. Here, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. The video tape is pre-set with a 'writing format. In this format, from the recording start point of the previous movie to the Cue Up point, an electrical head writing portion CT with additional color bar signals or text information is set. In other words, the first electric head writing device .2 2 B can be received at the instruction. The video / audio data SV 0 recorded on the management server of the broadcast server records the first electric head data CL 1 as the subject information. That is, the video / audio data SVO is recorded with the stamp of the video / audio data SVO in advance. In addition, at the broadcast server management terminal 25, the program data C1 of the program schedule is read in from the DB server 7 through the LAN 8, and the screen of the program schedule C1 based on the program schedule is applied to the screen of the broadcast server management terminal 25. The submit screen is displayed. In this case, the broadcast server management terminal 25 operates the keyboard or mouse with the members of the news department, and enters the required data, and based on the input, the broadcast server SV 1 is produced as a video material / sound material for the news. Submit instruction data. Use this as the delivery instruction data. D 1 applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 蚬 掊 (210x297) to the paper size of the paper through LAN8. -------------- Ί1Τ- ----- line (for the notes on the back of Jiuyueyu, please fill in this page again) -139- Printed by A7 B7, Employee Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of the invention And DB server 7. The DB server 7 stores the sending instruction data D 2 as the sending status data of the video / audio data SV 2. Here, the DB server 7 is registered in advance with the text data P2, which can be sent to the sending machine. A text is displayed on the display screen 3 2 1 of the control terminal 3 1 (displayed on the 67th frame (B)). On the other hand, the machine control terminal 3 1 is sent out, and the machine control data DS 2 is generated based on the sending instruction data D 2. Send "Control the machine · Control unit 32" to the machine control unit 32, and read the text data P2 corresponding to the sending instruction data D2 from the DB server 7 via LAN8. This is the second The electric head data CL 2 is sent to the second electric head writing device 2 2 C through the machine control section 3 2. Next, the machine control unit 32 generates a broadcast server control signal SM4 and a second electric head writing device control signal SM5 according to the machine control data DS 2 and sends the broadcast server control signal SM4 to the production broadcast server 2 2A. The projection server 2 2A is controlled, and the second electric head writing device control signal SM5 is sent to the second and second electric head writing devices 2 2 C to control the second electric head writing device 2 2 C. Next, the playback server 2 2 A sends the stored video / audio data S V 2 to the second electric head writing device according to the playback server control signal SM4. The second electric head writing device 2 2 C adds the second electric head data CL 2 to the electric head writing part of the video / audio data SV 1 in accordance with the second electric head writing device control signal SM2, so that the second electric head writing device 2 is added. Electric head information CL 2 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 male) --------- ^ ------ Order ------ 0 11 (To the first Read the notes on the back #Fill this page) -140- Printed by A7-B7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention description (13 & video / audio data SV 3 is sent to the sending machine control unit 5). That is, the second electric head writing device 2 2 C can record the second electric head data CL 2 as the subject matter information in the video / sound data SV 2 sent to the broadcast server management terminal 25. (14-2 ) When the recording operation of the broadcasting server management terminal is performed by the broadcasting server management terminal 25, as shown in FIG. 60, after the broadcasting management terminal 23 is started, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 The display screen of the screen displays the recording day and time 2 70. This recording screen 2 7 0 has a screen operation that can be operated on the screen. The group, as this operator, has various menu buttons consisting of a collection button 271, a submit button 272, a consistency button 273, a theme management button 2 7 4 and a pre-set button 2 7 5 at the top. Here is a member of the Ministry of Information If you use the mouse to touch the recording button 2 7 1 from the various menu buttons, the terminal body will display the information (item name, subject name, progress status, etc.) of each item of the recorded program in a list form on the broadcast server management. The display screen of the screen of the terminal 25. In fact, when the broadcast server management terminal 25 touches the program button 2 7 8 on the recording screen 2 70, a member of the Ministry of Information will count from the current time to the nearest Programs broadcast at any time (In this case, the program display section 2 7 6 displays "Wrap Up Today", and the scheduled date and time display section 27 7 displays "April 16 (Tuesday) 18: 00 ~ 18 · '25: 00 ”) Information related to each subject matter (item name, subject matter name, progress status, etc.) is displayed in the form of a list. --------- · '.'-------- Order-- ---- line} (ΤΛYou read (Notes on the back are stored on this page) This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 gong) -141-Α7 Β7 Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The combination theme button 2 7 9 is used to display the combination news theme which is to be recorded in the broadcast server 2 2 A in advance in the item display column 2 8 1. The universal theme button 2 8 0 is used for A button for the occasion where a news subject with frequent broadcast opportunities is pre-collected in the broadcast server 2 2 A and displayed on the item display block 2 8 1. Here, a description will be given of a state where the program theme button 2 7 8 is selected. The broadcast server management terminal 2 5, the item column 2 8 1 on the recording screen 2 7 0 was touched by the team member of the Ministry of Information (for example, the item number "1", the item name "headline", the composition number) "1" and the theme name "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban"), the entire horizontal row of the touched item is displayed in red, indicating that it is currently selected. In this state, if the member of the Ministry of Public Information touches the recording button 2 9 1, the ′ projection server management terminal 2 5 displays the source selection highlight menu 3 0 0 on the recording screen 2 7 0. As shown in Figure 61, the source selection highlighting menu 3 0 0 that is opened in the state of overlapping the recording screen 2 7 0 will form two VTRs (the first recorder and player) of the connected VTR 2 1 VI and the second video recorder V2) use the display mark "V 1" and the display mark "V2" to display, and use the display mark "RIj ~" R4 "to display the plural telephone lines for receiving news topics from the television station ( (4 lines in this case). That is, in this state, in the video tape installed on the first video player V 1, the theme name corresponding to the program "Wrap Up Today" is recorded (for the precautions on the back of the first reading #, please fill out this Page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 public dream) -142- Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs W: Industrial and consumer cooperative printing A7 B.7 V. Description of the invention (known as "Sagami Chuanyu "The ban on fishing was lifted." That is, if a member of the news department selects, for example, the first video player V 1 and clicks the execute button, the broadcast server management terminal 25 closes the source selection and highlights the explicit menu 3 0 0. The lower part of the item display column 2 81 can be used to visually confirm the news item collection status of the selected item ("Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban") by displaying the status screens 2 9 3 to 2 9 9. The message bar 2 7 0M at the bottom right of the screen 2 7 0, for example, when the VTR2 1 specified during recording is not connected to the broadcast server 2 2 A and cannot be recorded, the error information is displayed in text as shown in Figure 6 8 (A) as shown, such as The status screen 2 9 3 of the screen 2 7 0 displays the state before the execution button 3 0 1 of the source selection highlight menu 3 0 0 is touched. In addition, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the state Screen 293 Supply source selection highlights the execute button of the explicit menu 3 0 0; when TO 1 is touched, the recording sequence of "collection" is displayed on the display bar. In addition, on the status screen 2 9 3, the title display bar 3 2 5 Display the title of the theme of "Sagami River Fish Fishing Lifting", so that the members of the news department who are working can recognize the title of the theme at a glance. Set to the left of the time code column 3 2 3 and the OA ruler column 3 2 4 A rectangular stamp frame 3 2 6 is displayed in red when it is being recorded. At the same time, the image of the OA ruler's video / audio data starting point is displayed as a stamp. On the status screen 2 9 3 in the next paragraph A message bar 3 2 7 is provided, indicating that the paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standards (CNS) Αshirt seeing grid (210X297 cm) (Notes on the back of the first reading · Γ > Fill in this page), ιτ Line: -143 -A7 B? Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed cooperatives

V. Description of the invention 1 14 ^ 1 I shows "V 1 ST--BY" By this, the members of the Ministry of Information can recognize that the 1st recorder V 1 of 1 1 IVTR 2 1 is in the state of preparation 0 1 | Next, as shown in Fig. 6 (C), at the status screen 2 9 3, 1 1 Γ VI J of VTR 2 1 is completed, and the first electric head writing device reads 1 2 2 B and receives the first If the electricity investment is CL 1, the message becomes "1 1 V 1 ST — BY end J 5. With this, the members of the Ministry of Information can realize that the 1st recorder V 1 of VTR 2 1 is ready to end. Xiang Zai 1 I stamp at this time 3 2 6 In the execution box, the first paragraph of the video that is included in the broadcast server's script 1 2 2 A will be displayed as a stamp, and the real page 1 1 line box will be displayed in red. 〇1 1 Next, as shown in Fig. 6 (D), on the status screen 1 I 2 9 3 VTR 2 1 The first recorder V 1 finishes preparation, and order the display of the I message bar 3 2 7 Becomes "from V 1" and starts automatically 1 1 I included. 1 1 I stamp at this time 3 2 6 In the execution box, the first segment of the video recorded on the t2 2 A will be displayed as a stamp, and the execution box will be displayed in red at this time. 9 In the project display column 2 8 1, "Progress j is displayed 1 I in the display column 2 8 7" is displayed in "collecting j", in the "draw j display column 2 8 5 D in 1 I is also displayed and displayed on the stamp drawing 3 2 6 The first paragraph of the execution frame of the movie is the same as the 1 1 I stamp. 0 1 1 I is as shown in Figure 7 (E), on the status screen 2 9 3 by the new 1 1 stop of the team member to stop the operation When the recording is finished, the display 1 1 on the message bar 3 2 7 indicates that the factory V 1 has been included ", stamped; 3 2 6 the implementation box is also eliminated! 1 Red display 0 1 I This paper standard applies Chinese national standards (CNS ) A heart brother (2 丨 OX 297 public money) -144-Consumption of workers and workers at the Central Liye Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs i i Test A7 B7___ 5. Description of the invention (14 & (.1 4 — 3)) Broadcasting server The recording process of the management terminal is followed by the broadcast server The processing procedure for the processing terminal 25 to collect the news subject matter divided into each item on the broadcasting server 2 2 A will be described using the flowchart of FIG. 69. As shown in FIG. 69, the broadcasting server management terminal The processing program of 2 5 is entered from the start step of RT 1 and moves to step SP 2 1 1. At step SP 2 1 1, the recording screen is selected by the recording server management terminal 2 5 of the recording button 2 7 1 and the recording screen is selected. 2 70 is displayed on the display screen of the screen 321 and moves to step SP212. At step SP 2 1 2, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 determines whether the recording process of the recording screen 2 7 0 has ended. If a positive result is obtained here, The representative recording screen 2 70 has been instructed to end, and the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP 2 1 3 to end the recording process, and moves to other processing screens. If a negative result is obtained at step SP 2 1 2 , Which means that the news subject material specified on the recording screen 2700 times has not been collected on the broadcasting server 2 A, and the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 moves to step SP 2 1 4. At step SP 2 1 4, broadcasting Servo tube The management terminal 2 5 selects the news subject that should be included by the team member of the Ministry of Information and determines whether the inclusion button 2 9 1 is touched. If a negative result is obtained here, it represents the selection of the news subject that should be included and the button 2 9 1 The tapping was not performed, and the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 returns to step SP · 2 1 2 until it is instructed that the paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (2 丨 0X297 mm) ^--145- --------- install ------, order ------ ^ (read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Α7 Β7 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives System V. Description of the Invention (1 扃 1 1 Repeatedly until it is recorded. Perform the above processing. 1 I Contrary to this, if a positive result is obtained at step SP 2 1 4, the news subject that should be included in the generation 1 I list is selected and the recording button 2 9 1 is also clicked 1 1 | Touch, at this time the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 Move to step SP 2 15 ° Especially read I Ί In step SP 2 1 5 Broadcast server management terminal 2 5 Back 1 VTR 2 1 and Broadcast server 2 2 A Make preparations for recording, agree to matter 1 At 1 o'clock, the display of the factory V 1ST and ik 1 I — Β Υ in the message bar 2 2 3 of the status screen 2 9 3 will make the members of the Ministry of Information realize that the materials in preparation for the collection are written through the g., · I Μ LAN 8 is registered in DB server 7 to update the data (Fig. 6 8 (η S_✓ 1 1 I Β)). 1 1 At step SP 2 1 6 Broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 Issue an instruction to prepare for recording for the first recorder V 1 of the designated VTR 2 1 and the broadcasting server I 1 2 A Move to step SP 2 17 ° 1 I In step SP 2 1 7 Play server management terminal 2 5 In the register 1 1 I Record the first electric head data of the recorded image data via the LAN 8 from 1 1 DB server 7 Read out and send the f instruction to the first electric head writing device 2 2 B to the servo control terminal 2 3 and move to step SP 2 18 ° 1 1 at step SP 2 1 8 Broadcast server management terminal 2 5 Determine whether the 1st recorder player VI of 1 1 VTR 2 1 and the playback server 2 2 A are 1 1 I No. The recording preparation is completed. If you get a negative result here, it means that there is a situation in which the recording cannot be completed because the 1 1 VTR 2 1 is not connected properly, etc. At this time, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 moves to step 1 1 SP 2 1 9 〇1 I in step SP 2 1 9 9 Broadcast server management terminal 2 5 Included 1 1 1 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 regulations (210X297) ^ 146 · / Central Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Bureau of Standards, Industry, and Consumer Cooperatives A7 · B7 V. Description of the invention (14 ^ Message 2 of the screen 2 7 0 2 0 0M The reason for the failure to complete the preparation for inclusion is displayed in text and an error message is displayed and moves to step SP 2 2 0. At step SP220, the broadcast server management terminal 25 will log in to the DB server 7 through LAN 8 to update the data, and the processing will be performed in parallel with the processing after step SP 2 1 2 to remove the cause of the error. If a positive result is obtained at step SP 21 8, the recording preparation for the first video player and video server 2 2A representing VT.R2 1 has been completed. The server management terminal 2 5 moves to step SP 2 2 1. At step SP 2 21, the broadcast server management terminal 2'5 completes the preparation for recording, and eliminates the error 270M displayed in the message bar 2 70 of the recording screen Message, move to step SP222. At step SP 2 22, the broadcast server management terminal 25 makes the VTR 2 1 and the broadcast server 2 2A prepare for recording, and at the same time, the situation of ending the preparation for recording is displayed in the message bar of the status screen 2 9 3 3 2 7 "VI ST-BY completed" is displayed, and the data is updated by logging in to the DB server 7 via LAN 8 (Fig. 68 (C)). At step SP233, the broadcast server management terminal 25 'will collect the specified image data The instruction from the broadcast server 2 2 A gives an instruction to the server management terminal 2 3 and moves to step SP 2 2 4 ° At step SP 2 2 4, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 starts collecting the specified image data in the broadcast Servo 2 2A 'At the same time, the status of the recording is displayed on the status screen 2 9 3. The message bar 3 2 7 displays "V 1 This paper size is applicable. Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297)" ---- -----'------ 1T ------ line (to first read Jing (Notes on the above should be refilled). -147- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed A7 · B7 V. Description of the invention (14 ^ Included "" Log in to the DB server 7 via LAN8 and update the data ( (Fig. 68 (D)), the "progress" display block 2 8 7 of the item display column 28 1 is changed from "unrecorded" to "recorded" and moves to step SP 2 2 5. At step SP2 25, the broadcast server management terminal 25 sends an instruction to record the first electric head data CL1 to the image data to be recorded to the server control terminal 23 and moves to step SP2 26. At step SP 2 2 6, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 determines whether the team member of the Ministry of Information has touched the stop button of the status screen 2 9 3 3 2 8 «If a negative result is obtained here, it means that the team member of the Ministry of Information has not clicked When the stop button 3 2 8 is touched, the broadcast server management terminal 25 returns to step SP 2 2 6 and repeats the above-mentioned processing until instructed to record. On the other hand, if an affirmative result is obtained in step SP 2 2 6, the stop button 3 2 8 on the representative status screen 2 9 3 is touched, and at this time, the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP 2 2 7. At step SP 2 27, the recording server management terminal 25 will end the recording. In the status bar 2 9 3, the message bar 3 2 7 displays "VI has been recorded" (Fig. 68 (E)), and logs in via LAN8. The data is updated in the DB server 7, and the process returns to step SP212. At step SP 2 1 2, the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 has finished recording the specified image on the broadcasting server 2 2 A, so the processing of the recording screen 2 7 0 is ended, and the process moves to step SP 2 1 3 to end. All inclusion processing. This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 grid (210X297 public power) ---------'------ Order ------ line, (ΪΑ 先 读 诮Note: Please fill in this page again) -148-A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (14 ^ 1 1 (14-4) Broadcast server management terminal sending operation 1 1 by broadcast When the server management terminal 2 5 performs a recording operation, as shown in FIG. 70, the broadcast management terminal 2 5 is activated and displayed on the screen display screen of the ih 1 I broadcast server management terminal 25. Read out the screen first 1 .3 3 0. This send screen 3 3 0 has the 1 1 operator subgroup on the back of the screen that can be operated on the screen. As the screen operator, there is a send button on the top 1 1 3 3 1. Submit button 3 3 2. Consistent button 3 3 3 、 Theme management item 1 1 button 3 3 4 、 Pre-set button 3 3 5 Price of various menu buttons, ') 1 0 News here The team members use the mouse to click and send only the 1 1 I out button 3 3 4 from among the various menu buttons. The terminal body will send out the information of each item (project name, theme name, and progress status). Etc.) Displayed as a list of 1 1 on the screen of the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 3 2 1 (Order I 6 7 Figure (B)) 0 1 I Actually, it was sent out by the team member of the Ministry of Information at frjm If the program 1 1 button 3 3 6 on the screen 3 3 0 is displayed, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 will be shown at the closest time to the current time 1 1 (in this case, the program display line 1 2 7 6 "Wrap Up Today" is displayed, and the reservation is submitted 丨 3 time display sections 1 I 2 7 7 are not displayed Γ April 16th (Tuesday) 18: 0 0 18 1 1 I 2 5:00 j) Information related to the subject matter of the news (item name 1 1 title, subject name, progress status, etc.) is displayed on the item display bar 3 4 1 1 1 1 In this state, it is organized by the Ministry of Information Tap region will be sent out if the button 342 of the 1 1 I As shown in FIG. 7 1. like, broadcast servo machine management terminal 25 displays the 1 1 I out list screen 360 overlaps the fed out on the screen 330. This area 1 1 1 This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 gong) • 149-Printed A7 by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, _____B7___ 5. Description of the invention (14) 6 0 has a screen operation subgroup that can be operated on the screen. As the screen operator, there are menu buttons composed of a start button 3 6 1 and an end button 3 6 2 etc. Here, the team member of the Ministry of Information uses a mouse When the recording button is touched from among the various menu buttons, the terminal body displays information (theme name, 0A ruler, ID number, etc.) of each item of the program being sent in the sending column 3 6 3. The sending display column 3 6 3 is divided into "No." display column 363A, "submission target" display column 363B, "subject name" display column 363C, "0A ruler" display column 363D, and "ID number" display column 363E in the order of submission are displayed in various kinds of information. The area submission list screen 3 6 0 opened in the state superimposed on the submission screen 3 3 0 displays the status before the creation area submission list screen 3 6 0. Also That is to say, the area submission list screen 3 60 is the same as the area submission list screen 3 60 of the previous production, and the content of the previous production is displayed. In addition, the area submission list screen 3 60 of the previous production is a new production. On the occasion, the team member of the Ministry of Information deleted the content previously produced. ”The broadcast server management terminal 25, the item display column 3 4 1 on the sending screen 3 3 0 was touched by the team member of the news subject that should be sent ( For example, if the item number is "1", the item name is "Headline", the composition label is "1", and the theme name is "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban"), the entire horizontal row of the touched item is displayed in red, indicating that it is currently selected 〇 In this state, by the members of the Ministry of Information to send the list screen in the region This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 regulations (210X297 public dream) ---------- J ----- -, π ------ Line 4 (" Read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 150- Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (14) 3 6 0 If you touch the top line of the blank lines, As shown in FIG. 72 (A), the broadcast server management terminal 25 will send the subject name "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban" among the selected item names on the delivery screen 3 3 0, and the 0A rule "00: 10 "and the ID number" 20 0 0 0 0 0 1 "is displayed on the line that was tapped on the area send list screen 3 60. In this way, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 is displayed on the area send list screen 3 6 0 The news subject matter is to delete, insert, add, and move each news subject matter, determine the order in which the news subject matter is sent out, and correct the regional delivery list screen, 360. Next, the broadcast server management terminal 25, on the regional delivery list screen 3600, the display box 3636 of the Ministry of Information touched the subject of the subject name (for example, "Sagami River fish fishing ban"). If the display column 3 6 3 B is displayed, it will be superimposed on the submission screen 3 3 0. The submission target selection highlight menu 3 7 0 will be displayed. At the same time, the entire horizontal row of the clicked submission display column 3 6 3 will be displayed in red. Was selected to. As shown in Fig. 11 (B), the delivery object selection highlighting menu 3 7 0 is opened in a state of being superimposed on the delivery screen 3 3 0 and displayed using display symbols "S 1" to "S 3" The outgoing line of the connected outgoing device control unit 5 (three telephone lines in this case). In fact, if a member of the Ministry of Information chooses to display, for example, the symbol S 1 and then executes the button 3 71, the broadcast server management terminal 25 closes the delivery target selection and highlights the menu 3 7 0, as shown in Figure 7 2 (C). As shown, in the area submission list screen 36 〇 In the "submission object" display column of the selected subject name (for example, ". Sagamigawa fish fishing ban") This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4% grid ( 2 丨 0X297 公 牦} {Read the precautions on the back before filling {? 5 pages) • Order-line: • 151-Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives A7 β B7 V. Description of the invention (4 3 6 3 B displays the display symbol S 1 β. That is, if the team member of the Ministry of Information touches the start button 3 6 0 of the regional delivery list screen 3 6 1, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 will display the item on the delivery screen 3 3 0 The status screens 343 to 349 are displayed in the lower part of the display column 3 4 1 to visually check the status of the news subject matter with the subject name of the sequence number "1" (for example, "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unbanned j"). It is also set on the delivery screen 3. 3 0 and down the message bar 3 3 0Α is displayed with text as an error message when the sending device control unit 5 specified at the time of sending is not connected to the presentation server 2 2 Α and cannot be sent, as shown in FIG. 7 (A) Generally, for example, the status screen 3 4 3 of the sending screen 3 3 0 displays the state before the start button 3 6 1 of the area sending list screen 3 60 is touched. As shown in FIG. 73 (B) On the status screen 343, if the start button 3 61 of the area delivery list screen 3 60 is touched, the "send" order display column 3 6 3 B of the display column 3 6 3 displays the order of the submission. Screen 3 4 3 displays the title of the theme of "Sagami River Fish Fishing Lifting" in the title display column 3 8 7 so that the team members of the Department of Public Information can identify the title of the theme being sent at a glance. 3 8 5 and 0A ruler in the time code column A rectangular stamp frame 3 8 8 is set to the left of the column 3 8 6. The part of the frame is displayed in red when it is in the state of sending out. At the same time, the photo paper size of the starting point of the video / audio data of 0A rule is applicable to China. Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 > < 297 Public Love > --------- V ------ Order ------ Line-II (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -152- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ A7 ________B7 V. The description of the invention (15i " The image is displayed as a stamp. A message bar 3 8 9 is displayed on the next paragraph of the status screen 3 4 3, which displays "SI ST —BY ". With this, the members of the Department of Public Information can recognize that the sending machine control section 5 connected to the first telephone line S1 is preparing. Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the status screen 3 4 3 is completed by the sending machine control unit 5 connected to the first telephone line S 1 and the second electric mouse writing device 2 2 C receives When you reach the electric head. Data CL1, the display of the message bar 389 will change to "SI ST-BY completed". With this, the team member of the Ministry of Information can recognize that the 5th part of the sending machine control unit connected to the first telephone line is finished preparing. At this time, the stamp picture 3 8 8 is based on the first frame of the video sent to the playback server 2 2 A in the execution frame, and the execution frame is displayed in red. Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (D), when the PLAY button 390 is touched on the status screen 343, the display of the message bar 389 changes to "S1 sending", and the sending starts automatically. At this time, the stamp drawing 3 8 8 displays the first video of the image sent to the broadcast server 2 2A in the execution frame as a stamp frame, and displays the execution frame β in red. At this time, the item on the screen 3 3 0 is sent out. The "Progress" display column 341 of the display column 341 is displayed "Sending", and the "Picture" display column 3 4 1 D is also the same as the first video shown in the execution frame stamped 3 8 8 Stamp painting. Next, as shown in Fig. 73 (E), the 'stop' button on the status screen 34 3 if the status screen 3 43 is sized This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 乂 297 (Public Note) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) BOOK-153- A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (if d 391 is touched, the display of the message bar 389 will change to "S1 has been sent". The red display of the execution frame of the stamp 388 is also eliminated. Next, if the end button 3 9 2 on the status screen 3 8 8 is touched, the file of the broadcast server 2 2 A is deleted. Close the 'Submit screen 3 3 0' in the lower part of the item display column 1 1 1 The status screen 3 4 3 displays the content of the news subject with the next submission order number "2" (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives (1 4-5), the sending processing program of the broadcasting server management terminal is second. In fact, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 will actually separate the news topics according to the project order from the broadcasting server. Machine 2 2 A to send out the machine The processing procedure up to the submission by the production unit 5 will be described using the flowchart in Fig. 74. As shown in Fig. 74, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 moves from the start step of RT 1 to step SP 2 3 0. 'At step SP230, the broadcast server management terminal 25 starts the application software and initializes the data for displaying the transmission screen 3 3 0 through the DB 8 from the LAN server 7 and moves to step SP. 2 3 1. · At step SP231, the broadcast server management terminal 25 selects the send button 3 3 2 to display the send screen 3 3 0 on the display screen of the screen 32 1 (Fig. 67 (B)) to Step SP 2 3 2. --β r ¥ ---

I The paper size is in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0 > < 297 mm) -154- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A 7 '_____B7 5. Description of the invention (15 ^ In step SP 2 3 2, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 determines whether or not the screen 3 3 0 is instructed to end. If a positive result is obtained here, the representative has been instructed to end the screen 3 3 0, and the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 moves Go to step SP 2 3 2 to end the sending process and move to other processing screens. On the other hand, if a negative result is obtained at step SP 2 3 2, the representative 尙 has not instructed to end the sending screen 3 3 0 and the broadcast server management terminal 25 Move to step SP234. At step SP2 34, the broadcast server management terminal 25 selects the subject matter to be sent by the member of the Ministry of Information, and determines whether the start button 3 6 1 of the regional delivery list screen 3 6 0 is touched. If a negative result is obtained here, the selection of the news subject that should be sent and the touch of the start button 3 6 1 are not implemented. At this time, return to step SP 2 3 2 and repeat until instructed to send. On the other hand, if an affirmative result is obtained in step SP 2 3 4, the representative news subject to be sent is selected, and the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 and the region send list screen 3 6 0 start button 3 6 1 is touched, at this time the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 moves to step SP 2 3 5. At step SP 2 3 5, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 prepares for sending out by the broadcast server 2 2 A At the same time, “SI ST — BY” is displayed in the message bar 389 of the status screen 343, so that the members of the Ministry of Information can realize that the data in preparation for submission is registered in the DB server 7 via LAN 8 (Figure 73 (B)). At step SP 2 36, the broadcast server management terminal 25 applies the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 specification (210X297 mm)) to the paper size of the broadcast paper " 11 -155-(Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page)

, TT Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives, A7, B7. 5. Description of the invention (15 ^ Mapping server 2 2 A sends out instructions to prepare for sending and moves to step SP 2 3 7. At step SP 2 3 7 The broadcast server management terminal 2 5 reads out the second electric head data CL 2 recorded in the image data instructed to be sent out from the DB servo 7 through LAN 8 and sends the second electric head to the servo control terminal 2 3 The instruction sent by the writing device 2 2 C moves to step SP 2 38. At step SP 2 38, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 determines whether the broadcast server 2 2 A is ready to send out. If a negative result is obtained here , Represents the situation where the presentation server 2 2 A cannot complete the preparation for delivery due to reasons such as incorrect connection, etc. At this time, the presentation server management terminal 2 5 moves to step SP 2 3 9. At step SP 2 3 9, the presentation server The machine management terminal 2 5 will send the message display 3 3 0 in the message field 3 3 0A to the reason that the preparation for sending cannot be completed. The text display is used as an error message and the process moves to step SP 2 4 0. At step SP 2 4 0, the broadcast server management Terminal 2 5 will be wrong In the case of information, log in to the DB server 7 via LAN 8 and update the data. Remove the cause of the error in parallel with the processing after step SP 2 3 2 * On the other hand, if a positive result is obtained at step SP 2 3 8 it represents the broadcast server The machine 2 2 A has completed the delivery preparation, and the broadcast server management terminal 25 moves to step SP241. At step SP241, the broadcast server management terminal 25 has completed the delivery preparation, so the message column of the screen 3 3 0 is applicable to this paper size. China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

T% -156- Printed by A7 B, Cooper Cooperative of Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Explanation of the invention (3 3 0A The error message displayed is eliminated and the process moves to step sp 2 4 2 »At step SP 2 4 2, broadcast The server management terminal 25 will prepare for transmission at the broadcast server 2 2 A, and at the same time, the completion of the transmission preparation will be displayed in the message bar 389 of the status screen 343. "S 1 ST -BY completed" will be recognized by the members of the Ministry of Information The data in the case where the standby is completed is registered in the DB server 7 through the LAN 8 to update the data (Fig. 7 3 (C)). At step SP243, the broadcast server management terminal 25 issues a command to the server control terminal j 3 to specify The instructions sent by the news server 22A from the broadcast server 22A are moved to step SP244. At step SP 2 4 4, the broadcast server management terminal 25 starts sending the news materials from the broadcast server 2 2 A to the sending machine control unit 5 At the same time, the status of sending is displayed on the status screen 3 4 3. The message block 3 8 9 displays "S 1 sending", which will make the members of the Ministry of Information realize that the data currently being sent is registered on the DB server through LAN8. 7 and more Data, change the "progress" display column 341F of the item display column 3 4 1 of the screen 3 3 0 from "not submitted" to "sending", and move to step SP245 (Fig. 73 (D)). At step SP 2 4 5. The broadcast server management terminal 2 5 instructs the server control terminal 2 3 to record the second electric head data CL 2 in the image data to be sent, and moves to step SP 2 4 6. At step SP 2 4 6. The broadcast server management terminal 2 5 determines if the team member of the Ministry of Information has touched the stop button 3 9 1 of the status screen 3 4 3. If a negative result is obtained here, it means that the team member of the Ministry of Information has not touched the stop button. The paper scale uses the Chinese Standard for Household Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -157- < Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy ___._ B7_V. Description of the invention (button button 3 91 1, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 returns to step S 2 4 7 and repeats the above processing until instructed to send out. In contrast, at step S 2 4 6 If you get a positive result, it represents the state of the day and time 3 4 3 stop button 3 9 1 is touched, at this time the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 moves to step SP 2 4 7. At step SP 2 4 7, the broadcast server management terminal 25 will end the sending situation at The message bar 3 8 9 on the status screen 3 4 3 displays "S 1 has been sent", and logs in to the DB server 7 via LAN 8 to update the data, and returns to step SP232 (Fig. 73 (E)). At step SP 2 32, the broadcast server management terminal 25 has finished sending the designated news subject to the machine control section 5. After finishing the processing of the screen 3 3 0, it moves to step SP 2 3 3 to send Processing ends. (14-6) The action and effect are in the above configuration. The news subject that was instructed to be included in the broadcasting server management terminal 25 in the broadcasting server section 22 is given a "theme name" as the first electric head, and the "theme" The "name" is recorded in the news subject matter, and the news subject matter is recorded in the broadcasting server 2 A, so that the "name of subject matter" corresponds to the news subject matter instructed to be included and recorded. Subsequently, the broadcast server management terminal 25 was instructed to send the news subject matter as the second electric head CL 2, and the news subject matter was recorded in the news subject matter, and the news subject matter was sent out, so that "the subject name ", The use information and the news subject instructed to be sent are correspondingly sent. _____ I _ 丨 -called ------------. N --------- ITI n I n II n (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -158- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ____ B7 V. Invention Description (1 奂 In other words, even if the purpose of sending news items is changed In this case, the team member of the News Department displays the news subject on the display screen of the screen 3 2 1 at the time of sending. After visually confirming that the news subject corresponds to the "theme name", it is not necessary to attach the purpose information to the news subject. As before, the news subject is read in from the broadcast server 2 2 A each time it is changed, and the label display of the news subject is rewritten and re-recorded in the broadcast server 2 2 A. Therefore, the news subject can be surely sent out simply. According to the above configuration, the broadcasting server portion 22 is provided with a first electric head writing device 2 2 B on the recording side of the broadcasting server 2 2 A and a second electric head is written on the sending side of the broadcasting server 2 2A. Enter device 2 2C, which was included in the broadcast The news subject of the server management terminal 25 is appended with the "subject name" as the first electric head data CL 1. The "subject name" is recorded in the news subject, and the news subject is recorded in the broadcasting server 2 2A. The broadcast server management terminal 25 instructs the news subject matter to be sent with additional use information as the second electric head data CL 2, records the use subject information in the news subject matter, and sends the news subject matter, thereby enabling the use of the delivery Information is sent according to the news subject matter. In this way, a program production and delivery device 1 that can reliably send news subject matter with a simple operation can be realized. In addition, according to the above-mentioned structure, by recording the information on the purpose of sending in the news subject matter, the information can be transmitted to the news department. When the team member displays the news subject matter on the display screen of the screen 321 as needed, the "subject name", the purpose information and the news subject matter can be visually confirmed by corresponding to each other. Therefore, the subject matter name, the purpose information, and the news subject matter can be surely confirmed. Correspondence (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page The standard is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -159- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ___B7_ V. Description of the invention (1 旮 Sent. (1 4-17) Other Examples and Sections The corresponding part of Figure 1 is attached with the same symbol. In Figures 6 and 6, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 reads the program information C1 of the program schedule from the DB server 7 through LAN8, and based on this program schedule The program data C1 of the list will be displayed on the screen of the broadcast server management terminal 25. In this case, the broadcasting server management terminal 25 operates a keyboard or a mouse with a member of the Ministry of Information to input desired data, and generates video / sound data SV2 to which the first electric head data CL 1 is added based on the input. The broadcast server's subject matter sending instruction data is used as the subject matter sending instruction data D3 to the sending machine control terminal 31 and the DB server 7 via LAN8. The DB server 7 uses the subject matter sending instruction data D 3 as the image / sound data SV 2 Subject sends status information and is contained. Here, the DB server 7 is previously registered with the text data P 3, and the text can be displayed on the display screen of the screen 3 2 1 (display input FIG. 4 (C)) of the output terminal 31. On the other hand, the machine control terminal 31 is sent out, and the machine control data DS 2 is generated based on the material transmission data D 3, which is sent to the machine control section 32, and the machine control section 32 is controlled, and at the same time, it is transmitted from the DB servo 7 through the LAN 8 Read in the text data P 3 corresponding to the material transmission instruction data D 3 ′ and use this as the third electric head data CL 3 to send it to the second electric head writing device 2 2 C through the machine control section 3 2. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ~ '--------- I ------ t ------ (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (Next, the machine control section 32 generates the broadcast server control signal SM6 and the second electric head according to the machine control data DS 2 The writing device control signal SM7 is sent to the broadcasting server 2 2A by sending the broadcasting server control signal SM6 to the broadcasting server 2 2A, and the second electric head is written to the device controlling signal SM7 to the second electric head. The writing device 2 2 C sends out and controls the second electric head writing device 2 2 C. Next, the playback server 2 2 A sends the stored video / sound data SV 2 to the second server in accordance with the playback server control signal SM6. The head writing device 2 2 C input. The second electric head writing device 2 2 C, according to the second electric head writing device control signal SM7, and a third electric head is added to the electric head writing part of the video / audio data SV2. The data CL 3 is sent to the sending machine control unit 5 as the video / audio data SV 4 to which the third electric head data CL 3 is added. 〇 In other words, the second electric head writing device 22 C can record the third electric head data CL 3 as the subject information on the video / audio material SV2 sent by the broadcast server management terminal 25 to the instructed subject matter. Here, in On the display screen of the screen 321 (shown in FIG. 67 (C)), it is possible to visually confirm that the selected theme name, theme sending information, and news theme are corresponding. (1 4-8) Other embodiments of the theme issue operation loan In the case where the broadcast server management terminal 25 performs the subject matter sending operation, as shown in FIG. 70 and FIG. 75 (A), the broadcast server (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Order- Line, This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) -161-Α7 Β7 Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (1 from the management terminal 2 5 Screen 3 3 0 has a screen operation subgroup that can be operated on the screen. As the screen operator, there are various menu buttons at the top. Here, a member of the press department touched the theme of the menu buttons with a mouse. When the button 3 4 2 A is pressed, the broadcast server management terminal 25 displays a theme sending list screen 400 for sending news subjects to other TV stations, and superimposes on the sending screen 330. This theme sending list screen 4 0 0 is possible The screen operation subgroup operated on the screen, as the screen operator, has a menu button composed of a start button 4 01, an end button 4 02, and the like at the top. Here, the broadcast server management terminal 25 sends the theme. Information of each item of the program (submission target, subject name, OA ruler, ID number, etc.) is displayed in the subject sending column 403. The subject matter sending display field 4 0 3 is divided into: "number" display block 403A 'in the subject matter sending order, "submission object" display field 403B, "subject name" display field 403C, "OA ruler" display field 403D, and "ID number" Display block 403E displays various information separately. In this case, the subject matter sending / sending list screen 400 which is opened in a state superimposed on the sending screen 3300 is displayed in a state before the subject matter sending / sending list screen 400. The broadcasting server management terminal 25, the item display column 3 4 1 on the sending screen 3 3 0, and the news subject that should be sent by the subject (for example, the item number "1 j, item name" headline) ", The composition number" 1 ", and the theme name" Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban "), the entire horizontal row of the touched item will be displayed in red for the performance (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ) **

I This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) _ 1β2 Printed bags for consumer cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 __ V. Description of invention (ι FREE is being selected. In this state, a member of the Ministry of Information If you tap on the top of the blank line on the subject line send list screen 4 0 0, the broadcast server management terminal 2 5 selects the subject name of the selected item name on the send screen 3 3 0 "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unlocked" ", 〇Α ruler" 00:10 ", and 1 D number" 2000000 1 "are displayed on the touched line of the theme sending and sending list screen 4 0 0. In this way, the broadcast server management terminal 25 sends the sending list on the theme. Screen 4 0 0 displays the news subject matter. In order to determine the order of sending the news subject matter, each news subject matter is deleted, inserted, added, and moved, and the subject matter is sent and sent out the list screen 4 0 0. Next, the broadcast server management terminal 25 is displayed. The subject matter sending and sending list screen 4 0 0 The subject matter sending display block 4 0 3 The member of the Ministry of Information touched the subject matter name (for example, "Sagami River Fish Fishing Lifting Ban j") "Target" display 4 0 3 B, display the list of delivery objects 4 1 0 superimposed on the send screen 3 3 0 and the theme send send list screen 4 0 0, and at the same time send the touched theme send display bar 4 0 3 The entire horizontal row of is displayed in red, indicating that it is currently selected. The sender list 4 1 0 opened in the state superimposed on the send screen 3 3 0 and the subject send send list screen 4 0 0 displays the plural registered beforehand. Sending target (eg "SSS", "TTTT") ° In fact, if a member of the Ministry of Information touches the sending target 411 (eg "SSS") on the sending target list 4 10, the broadcasting server ’s paper size applies to China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 0X297mm) ---------'------- Order ------ line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) -163- Yinjia A7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs-__ B7 V. Description of the invention (Administrative terminal 25 on the theme sending and sending list screen 4 0 0 on the selected theme name (such as "Sagami River Fish "Release fishing") 403B displays "SSS". As shown in Figure 75 (B), and at the same time, the entire horizontal row of the touched sender 4 1 1 is displayed in red, which means that it is currently selected. In other words, When the delivery target is not registered, at the broadcast server management terminal 25, a member of the news department uses the keyboard to input the send target (for example, three Chinese characters), and then press the keyboard's Enter key, the broadcast server management terminal '2 5 On the subject matter sending / sending list screen 4 0 0, "sending subject" (for example, "SSS") is displayed in the "sending subject" display field 4 0 3B of the selected subject name. In other words, if the team member of the Ministry of Information touches the start button 4 0 1 of the theme sending and sending list screen 4 0 0, the broadcasting server management terminal 2 5 displays the same status screen 3 4 3 as the above-mentioned regional sending, and In the status screen 3 4 3, the title display column 3 8 7 displays the theme name of "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban", so that you can visually check the transmission sequence number "1" of the TV station to which the target (for example, "SSS") is sent. Theme status (e.g. "Sagami River Fish Fishing Unban") status of theme delivery. It is possible to realize a program production and delivery device 1 capable of reliably transmitting related news subjects with a simple operation. Also in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the case where the news subject matter to which the sending purpose information is added is sent to the sending machine control unit 5 is described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the news subject matter is consistently stored Library (Library) 28 (shown in Figure 1), etc., I can also get I! I 11 11; '1 n order I-II line ^^ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper Standards apply to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210X297 mm) -164- A7 B7 Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China. 5. Description of the invention (A Same effect as the above embodiment. In addition to the above The embodiment is described in the case where the broadcast server 2 2 A is provided with the first electric head writing device 2 2 B on the recording side and the second electric head writing device 2 2 C is provided on the sending side. The invention is not limited to this. Even if it is applicable to the program production and delivery device 1 of the electric head writing device which adds the first electric head data CL 1 and the second electric head data CL 2 as subject matter information in any case, Also obtainable with the above embodiment In the above embodiment, the news subject matter of the first electric head writing device 2 2 B is the video / audio material SV 〇 which is a news subject matter from the VTR 21 recorded in the video tape. The occasion is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the news subject matter is inputted into a news subject matter such as a hard disk drive device included in a hard disk, it is suitable for a program production and sending device for additional news subject matter information. 1. The same effect as in the above embodiment can also be obtained. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the description is given for the case where the program theme is submitted, but the present invention is not limited to this, even if the delivery is intended to be included in the broadcast in advance The program production and delivery device 1 such as a combination theme or a general theme of the servo 2 2 A can also obtain the same effect as the above-mentioned embodiment. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the use of text is added to the news theme The information display form will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. A graphic is used as the display form of the information. , Or use both text and graphics to display information. For example, "Sagamigawa fish fishing --------- '* > ------ 1T ------ β (please first Μ Read the notes on the back of the page and fill in this page again.) This paper size applies Chinese National Standards (CNS) Α4 specifications (2 丨 0X297 mm) -165- Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperation Du printed A7 _ B7 _5 The description of the invention (16b Lifting the ban) and the graphics of fish and fishing rod are also possible. (1 5) Management of the collection of news and film themes (15-1) The collection of news and film themes and the corresponding parts in Figure 1 are given the same symbol As shown in FIG. 76, the news program production and delivery device 1 is provided with a recording theme recording area 2 2 A which determines the recording theme to be transmitted by the broadcasting server section 22, and a recording pending transmission area is included. The combined subject collection area 2 2 B of the combined subject matter, and the generic subject collection area 2 2 C where the general subject matter that has not yet been determined is sent. In this case, the news program production and delivery device 1 is set in the control unit of the broadcasting server management terminal 25, and the application software (hereinafter referred to as the recording application software) for collecting and recording the subject matter of the news movie is activated on the screen ( (Not shown) The recording screen is displayed. In this way, the control unit of the broadcast server management terminal 25 generates an operation signal SS 1 representing the operation content of the operation button to be touched by the operator using the mouse to touch various operation buttons on the recording screen. This is sent to the machine control section 2 4 through the servo control terminal 23. The machine control unit 2 4 generates a control signal SG 1 corresponding to the operation content displayed by the input operation signal SS 1, and applies this signal to the corresponding broadcast server unit 2 2. 1VTR2 1A, 2VTR2 1 B, and / or selector 430 to send and control. The news subject of the recorded video that is played by the 1VTR2 1A and 2 VTR 2 1 B or (Please read the note on the back first Please fill in this page again for the size of the paper) The size of the paper is applicable to Chinese families (CNS > Α4 size (210 × 297 mm) -166- Yin Gong Consumer Cooperative, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Yin Chang A7 * ______B7 From the series of television stations, the telephone lines R 1 to R 4 are supplied to the selector 4 3 0, and the news subject matter of the recording target selected by the selector 4 3 0 can be recorded in the corresponding recording of the broadcasting server section 2 2 "Area" (1 5-1 to 1). In fact, as shown in Fig. 60, the control unit of the broadcast server control terminal 25 first starts with the broadcast theme of the broadcast server 22. When recording, the operator uses a mouse When the 'collection' button 3 7 1 of the recording screen 2 7 0 displayed on the screen is touched, all of the news movie theme display unit 2 8 1 are displayed as blank lines. After that, the control unit touches the program theme button 2 7 by the operator. 8 and read the program composition file FD from the DB servo 7 through the broadcast server controller terminal 9. From the program data C 0 of the program composition file FD, the program to be sent in the future is selected, corresponding to the program closest to the current time ( (Broadcasting) The program composition table of the program at the predetermined time, and only the news and film theme is selected from the selected program composition table. With this, the control unit displays various information corresponding to the selected news and film theme on the news and film theme display unit 2 8 1 corresponding to the "item number / item name" column 2 8 2, "composition number / article name" column 283, "〇Αfoot" column 284, etc. In addition, the control unit will correspond to the selected program composition table program The name and the scheduled delivery time of the program are displayed on the corresponding program name display section 2 7 6 and the delivered date display section 2 7 7. Here, the control As shown in the various news and film themes of the news and film theme display section 281, the objects to be included, such as Sagamigawa fish {Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The paper size of this paper applies the Chinese national standard (CNS > Α4 specification (2 丨 0 > < 297 mm) -167- 2 TT letter m 297bjst 0 s * I Hong Kong iii Sight child i2 5§s t- s > Cat win_ 商 迪 藏 _opia | Difficulty 1 ^ Overturn Fan Fan 2 T 9SSS > 0 Yu Su Pan Pan 1 Window-by-window chanting Ύ 9 Ε and gt; Β 菡 菌 i Τ I try to be as difficult as possible_ping§ 商 砟 观 却 § e 普 ^ ns IS, • Tour 1 ¾ Zhuo i Hong Kong Lions but every one — Mu 1 Pu Xiang Ife Coffee | Difficult _3 2 y 0 5 defeated Seoul ® Shang Di nian 褴 褴 那 斉 斉 尔 讽Zhong Zhuozheng Shun Nan_West 2 T 0 3 Thanks 3 praises>%-Lion but watch the clock error 2 S 1 § chop | 3 song book lion department § chop i minus SH > I slash Sifmjs3m7m dish with hot tear 3 § ilo μ is 1 i ^ s 1 F 0 emblem | _ Hong Kong Han | Knee-Mi Li i 9 Voice: DB over | V Cat KTm Nen Li Zhuo 0 b Han _ iy.

But search 2 Θ 2SE2ID 游 ® S® * Ball Wei Shili ~ Pei! $ __ 翻 钟 诗 难 Ugly_! ^ 1 Shake and move. 5S Miscellaneous Office Puro β 3 Circumstances> si search and hang cat im gift 1 every difficult to shake and dirty 3 1 ILS — 1 swim _3 1 M — > i ffl i I ^ ii W private business — xt defense Clan! 3i falling lion f * 31 window flj ± li falling Sth i 2 2 3 mixed. ιί7π_ ± η knee i strike m W Shangi jJt martyrdom § disc lion driving § I oli ”to .0. § Shang shang i port vineyard martyrdom I county t ^ mlith disc Luo Shi, but tells every chicken TTS- ^ JirLXBC ίΜ A7 B7 The Wujiaming instructions printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (1 warehouse, 1 I form (hereafter referred to as the combination theme list) are read out through the broadcast server controller 1 | terminal 9. 1 I In this way, the control unit displays the combination theme list for each combination theme 1 1 Various information is displayed on the news movie theme display unit 4 3 1 The corresponding first read 1 1 Factory item number / item J column 2 8 2 'Plant composition number / the name of the subject on the back 1 1 called J column 2 8 3, Γ 〇A ruler' column 2 8 4 etc. 〇 In addition to the control unit to pay attention to the party 1 section I giant name display 2 7 6 display combination Theme 0 item again 1 | In this state, when the operator touches the input button% Ben 1 \. 4 3 2 with the mouse, it repeats in the designated part of the 'collection screen 2 7 0' Stacked combo title page 1 1 Material input highlight menu e Enter the combination theme as shown in Figure 7 8 1 Enter the highlight menu 4 3 5 The display is newly included in the broadcast server 1 | 2 2 The subject name column 4 3 6 of the subject matter name of the combined subject matter, and the scale bar 4 3 7 0 1 1 I showing the order of the recorded combined subject matter. In this case, the control unit is set by the operator through Broadcast server management 1 1 Final-f-ti tm 2 5 Switch or keyboard to input the subject matter of the combination subject of the recording object 1 1 If you enter a 0 A rule at the same time, the combination subject matter will be highlighted in the combination subject input) j Single 4 3 The theme name of 5 is 4 3 6 and 0 A. The ruler 4 3 7 displays 1 I to indicate the name of the theme and the scale. In addition, the control section in the top line of the blank line of the news and film theme display section 4 3 1 of the recorded picture 1 I 1 face 2 7 0 "composition number / theme name J column 2 8 3 and Γ 1 1 0 A Ruler J Column 2 8 4 The theme name 1 I and the broadcasting rule of the combined subject matter are displayed respectively, and the news and film subject matter display section 4 3 1 is displayed in the factory area 1 I. The J column 2 8 8 is the combination 〇In this way, the control unit will set the newly combined subject matter that was newly included in 1 1 1 -L-TT? Broadcasting server unit 2 2 to be included in the broadcasting server 1 1 1 CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -170- A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the People's Republic of China 5. State of Invention (Ministry 22). In fact, the control department included the news subject matter of the screen 2 7 0 The display unit 4 3 1 displays various information on the combination theme actually recorded in the broadcasting server unit 2 2 (in this case, the “progress” column 2 8 7 is already included), In the state where the theme of the combination theme of the broadcasting server unit 22 is still newly added, the operator uses the mouse to touch the line of the unlisted combination theme of the news movie theme display unit 4 3 1 (is The touched line is displayed in a different color from the other lines in the same way as the above-mentioned broadcasting theme.) If you touch the recording button 2 9 1, it will be displayed on the recording screen 2 7 0 in the same way as the above-mentioned recording theme. Source selection highlight menu 3 0 0. In this state, the control unit selects the highlight menu from the supply source. The operator uses the mouse to click on the representative, which is the first VTR2 that contains a pre-recorded and edited combination video. If the VI button of 1A is clicked and the execution button 3 01 is touched, an operation signal representing the recorded execution is generated, and this is sent to the machine control section 24 through the servo control terminal 23. The machine control section 24 is based on the The input operation signal generates a VTR control signal, and sends the pair of first VTR21A, so that it plays the combined theme at the first VTR 2 1 A, and simultaneously generates a server control signal based on the operation signal. Then, send the pair of broadcast server sections 22, so that the broadcasted composite subject is recorded in the combined theme recording area 2 2 B of the broadcast server section 22. In addition, the combined theme recorded in the video tape is used in The linear editing machine 20 is edited based on the preset time of the previous movie and the last movie, and the playback rule input by the operator. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) -171-Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 _ B7 DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION The control section, as described above, highlights the menu through the combination theme input 4 3 5 The operator enters the theme name and broadcast rule of the combination theme of the object to be recorded, and displays the theme name and broadcast rule in the news Movie theme display section 4 3 1. Register the combined subject matter of the collection target in the combination theme list, and simultaneously use the unlisted combination theme line or the recording button 2 9 1 of the news movie theme display section 2 8 1 to sequentially use the slide When the mouse clicks, the combined subject matter of the recording target supplied from the specified supply source is recorded in the combined subject matter recording area 2 2 Β of the broadcast server unit 22. In this way, the control unit uses the combined subject matter after the end of the combined subject matter collection When the mouse clicks the registration button of the recording screen 2 70, the combination subject list previously read from the DB server 7 is added to register the registration target A new combination theme list of combined themes (already included and / or not included) is sent to the D Β server through the broadcast server controller terminal 9, and the new combination theme list is registered at the D Β server 7. Therefore, in the news program production and distribution device 1, the combined subject matter recorded in the combined subject matter recording area 2 2 Β of the broadcasting server unit 22 can be managed based on the combined subject matter list registered in the D Β server 7. 1 5 — 1 — 3) Inclusion of general-purpose themes In addition, the control unit of the broadcast server management terminal 25, when collecting general-purpose themes, the operator uses the mouse to touch the general-purpose theme button 2 7 0 on the recording screen 2 8 If it is 0, the universal theme button 2 8 that should be touched will be fully controlled by the broadcast server from the universal theme theme list (hereinafter referred to as the universal theme list) registered from the DB server 7 Reader terminal 9 (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page)

This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 pit (210X297 mm) -172- Dubbing Consumer Cooperative Du Yin of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs «. A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (from 17h. By this, the Ministry of Control Display various kinds of information of each universal theme represented by the universal theme list in the corresponding "item number / item name" column 2 of the news movie theme display section 2 8 2. "composition number / name of theme" column 283, "0A Ruler column 284, etc. In addition, the control section displays the general theme on the program name display section 2 7 6. In this state, when the operator touches the input button 4 3 2 with the mouse, the recording screen 2 7 0 The general theme input highlight menu similar to the combination theme input highlight menu 4 3'5 described above is superimposed and displayed. In this way, the control unit inputs the theme name of the general theme of the object to be recorded through the switch or keyboard. At the same time, if you enter the video ruler, in the blank line of the news screen theme display section of the recording screen 2 7 0, the "composition number / theme name" column 2 8 3 and The "0A ruler" column 2 8 4 is the general name of the subject matter and the broadcast ruler. At the same time, it displays the general purpose in "Division j column 2 8 8" of the news and film theme display section. In this way, the control section will be newly included The general-purpose subject matter of the broadcast server part 22 is set to a state that can be recorded in the broadcast server part 22. In fact, the control part is in the same manner as the above-mentioned combined subject matter when collecting the news movie subject matter on the screen 2700. The display unit displays various information corresponding to the general-purpose theme actually recorded in the broadcast server unit 22, and also displays the status of the theme name and the like corresponding to the general-purpose theme newly recorded in the broadcast server unit 22 , The operator uses the mouse to touch the unused general subject line of the news and film subject display section (the touched line and the above broadcast question (谙 read the precautions on the back before filling this page). The paper size applies China National Standards (CNS) A4 Specification (210X297 mm) -173- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A 7 · B7 V. Description of the invention (17) Color display) When the recording button 2 91 is touched, the source selection highlight menu 3 0 0 is superimposed on the recording screen 2 7 0. In this state, the control section selects the highlight menu 3 0 from the supply source. The operator taps the representative device For example, if the V1 button of the first VTR 2 1 A is recorded and edited in advance, and the general-purpose video is clicked, and then the execution button 3 0 1 is clicked, an operation signal representing the recorded execution is generated, and this is transmitted through the servo. The machine control terminal 2 3 is sent to the machine control section 24. The machine control section 24 generates a VTR control signal based on the input operation signal, and sends this pair of first VTR 2 1 A to the first VTR 2 1 A The universal theme is played, and a server control signal is generated based on the operation signal, and the pair of broadcast server sections 22 is sent out to be included in the universal theme recording area 2 2 C of the broadcast server section 22 to be played. Universal theme. In addition, the general-purpose theme recorded on the video tape is the same as the case of the above-mentioned combined theme. In the linear editing machine 20, based on the preset time of the previous movie and the last movie, and the playback rule input by the operator Edited. The control section displays the general name of the general subject to be recorded and the ruler by the operator through the general-purpose theme input prominent menu as described above, and displays the subject name and the ruler on the news and film subject display section. The general subject to be recorded is registered in the general subject list. At the same time, the row or the recording button 2 9 1 of the unlisted general subject in the news movie subject display section is sequentially clicked with a mouse to be supplied from the source. The general subject matter of the objects to be collected is included in the general server subject area of the broadcast server department 2 The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ~ -174-II ____ nn _ n '-I _ n _ I _ τ ϋ t— n ϋ _ _, T 矣 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by A7 · B7, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (4 2 2 C. In this way, after the recording of the universal theme is completed by the control unit, when the operator touches the registration button of the collection screen 2 70 with the mouse, the list of the universal theme read from the DB server 7 before Additional registration A new list of universal themes (already included or not included) of the objects to be recorded is replaced, and it is sent to the DB server 7 through the broadcasting server controller terminal 9 and a new one is registered in the DB server 7 List of general-purpose themes. In this way, in the news program production and delivery device 1, the general-purpose themes included in the general-purpose subject collection area 2 2 of the broadcasting server section 22 can be based on the general-purpose subjects registered in the DB server 7. (1 5-2) Edit the program composition table. However, in the news program production and distribution device 1, the combination theme or general theme recorded by the broadcasting server unit 2 2 is transmitted as a program as described above. (That is, from the state where the delivery is undecided to the state where the delivery is determined), it is necessary to edit the program by combining the combined theme or general theme recorded in the broadcasting server unit 22 into the program composition table. Composition table 0 In this case, the editing of the program composition table is performed by, for example, the console terminal 18. In the console terminal 18, the control section causes the application software for editing the program composition table to be activated ( This is referred to as editing application software hereinafter to edit the program composition table. In fact, when the control unit of the console terminal 18 edits the program composition $, the operator designates the copy of the program composition table to be edited through a keyboard or the like. Paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) M specification (21〇χ297mm) Order ------ line (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -175- A7 B7 Central Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed for Beigong Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (17¾ words, the starting editing application software reads the program configuration file FD from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server controller terminal 9 and at the same time the operator reads the program read from the program The program material C 0 constituting the archive selects the program material C 0 of the designated program composition table. Thereby, the control unit displays the selected program material C 0 as a program configuration table on the program registration screen. In this case, the parts corresponding to FIG. 6 are given the same symbols. As shown in FIG. 79, the control section of the console terminal 18 on the program registration screen 4 3 8A will select the selected program data. Various information of C 0 is displayed in the program composition 'table 4 3 8 corresponding item column 9 7, "start time / time" column 9 8 and composition time column 9 9 etc. At the same time, the program name and the scheduled date and time are displayed. In the display part 9 5 B »In this state, when the operator touches the NV theme button 4 3 9 with the mouse, the NV theme button 4 3 9 that should be touched highlights the theme selection (not shown) (Illustrated) Superimposedly displayed on the program registration screen 4 3 8Α. As shown in Figure 80, the theme selection highlights the menu 4 4 0, with a combination button 4 4 1 that selects a combination theme, and a universal button 4 4 2 that selects a universal theme. A play material button 4 4 3 of a play material registered in a program composition table different from the program composition table 95 in the program registration screen 4 3 8 A is selected. In this case, when the operator uses the mouse to touch the theme to select the combination button 4 4 1 or the display button 4 4 2 of the pop-up menu 4 4 0, the control unit will correspond to the touched combination button 4 respectively. The combination theme list or universal theme list of 4 1 or the universal button 4 4 2 is read from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server controller terminal 9. In addition, the control department used the paper size of the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) by the operator. TZ1 ----- IT -------- 嗥(Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page.) Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, printed A7 * _B7 V. Description of the invention If the date recorded in the broadcast server section 2 2 is designated by the yesterday button 4 4 4 or today button 4 4 5 or the broadcast day designation section 4 4 6, based on this, it will be recorded on the broadcast server on the specified date. The program composition file FD of the broadcasting subject matter of the machine department 22 is read from the DB server 7 through the broadcasting server controller terminal 9. Here, the parts corresponding to those in FIG. 6 are given the same symbols, and are first shown in FIG. 81. As shown, when the control section is designated by the theme selection and the combination button 4 4 0 of the explicit menu 4 4 0 is selected, all the combination themes represented by the combination theme list are respectively the theme name (for example, 5 characters from the beginning) and A list of plural combination theme buttons 4 · 4 8 made by the slide rule The formed combination theme list prominently displayed 4 4 9 is superimposed and displayed on the program registration screen 4 3 8 Α. In this state, when the operator touches each combination theme button 448 with the mouse, for example, it is displayed as The combination theme button 4 4 8A of "The appearance of a tourist" (the name of the theme), and then, for example, the additional button 4 50 is touched, and then the program composition table 438 displayed as the program registration screen 4 3 8A is, for example, " "Mother's ranch spring" (item name) is displayed in the time column 9 9 when the "2" line 4 3 8A is displayed. After the touched line 4 3 8 A, the "look of a tourist" is added. In this way, the control unit can change the combination theme of the "look of a tourist" which is included in the combination theme collection area 22B of the broadcasting server unit 22 from an undelivered state to a state where the delivery is determined. Also in the combined theme list Highlight menu 4 4 9 except for the above (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

.tT-line, this paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -177 · A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (17¾ additional button 4 5 0 of In addition, a front insert button 4 5 1 is provided. When the operator changes the program composition table 4 3 8 and adds the button 4 5 0 and touches the front insert button 4 5 1, the "tourist appearance" can be changed. The composition is inserted before the trip to "Mom's Ranch Spring" 4 3 8 A. In addition, the combination theme highlight menu 4 4 9 is provided, and a close button 4 5 2 for closing the combination theme highlight menu 4 4 9 is provided. And the same corresponding parts as in FIG. 6 are given the same symbols. As shown in FIG. 82, the control unit combines the combination of the theme of “the appearance of tourists” into the program on the program registration screen 4 5 4A. Table 4 5 4 and change the combination theme from the state of undelivered to the state of the determined decision, and can edit the program composition table 4 5 4. At this time, the control unit accompanies the program composition table 4 5 4 to edit the program composition Table 4 5 4 Composition time column 9 9 The corresponding information such as the video column 100 and the audio column 1 03 are automatically displayed, and the "start time / time" column 9 8 is automatically corrected at the same time. In addition, when the subject matter of the control unit is composed of video and audio (broadcast) The same applies to the subject matter and general-purpose subject matter) In the sound column 1 0 3 of the program composition table 4 5 4 is displayed, for example, 4 characters ("tourist") from the beginning of the subject matter name of the combined subject matter as the sent The combination of themes can send sounds for the operator to visually confirm. However, the sound level of the sound is set to the BG (background) level. On the other hand, the control section highlights the explicit menu 4 4 0 and specifies the universal button 4 In the case of 2 2, all the universal themes shown in the universal theme list are displayed in a general theme list highlight menu with the same structure as the combined theme list highlight menu 4 4 9 described above, and the general theme list is displayed. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page.) The size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) -178- Member of the Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumption cooperative prints A7 _____B7 ___ V. Description of the invention (1) 6 The highlighting menu with the theme list is superimposed on the program registration screen 4 3 8 A. In this state, the control unit and the above-mentioned program composition table using the combined theme The editing of 4 3 8 is carried out in the same way, and the program composition table 4 3 8 for the admission theme is edited, and the general theme can be changed from the undelivered status to the submitted decision status. Further, the control section highlights the explicit menu 4 in the theme selection. When the 4 0 3 broadcast theme button 4 4 3 is designated, the program material C0 of the file FD is constructed based on the program image, and the broadcast theme list 4 4 9 with the same composition as the highlight menu 4 7 is superimposed and displayed on the program. The registration screen 4 3 8 A is in this state in the same way as the editing of the program composition table 4 3 8 using the combination theme described above, and the program composition table 4 38 can be edited by entering the broadcast theme. (1 5 — 3) Editing of the program schedule Here, the news program production and sending device 1 sends (plays) the combined theme recorded in the broadcasting server unit 22, except for the above described console terminal 18 The editing of the program composition table, and in fact, based on the program schedule, when the corresponding program is sent, the program schedule terminal 32 combines the program schedule with a combination of subject matter and edits, based on the edited program. The schedule can send (broadcast) the combined subject matter. 〇 In this case, at the schedule schedule terminal 32, the control unit will start the program schedule editing application software when the news program is sent (broadcast). Programs on the schedule of the programs being sent (please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) The size of the paper is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210X297 mm) -179- A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, V. Description of the invention (17> Data C 1 is read from the DB server 7, and the program is based on this program data c 1 The schedule screen is displayed on the screen. The part corresponding to Figure 9 is given the same symbol 'in the control section of Figure 8 and the program schedule screen 1 1 5 combination buttons 4 5 5 by the operator When designated by the touch screen, the combination theme list is read from the DB server 7 through the play controller terminal 9. Based on the combination theme list, the combination list is prominently displayed on the menu 4 5 6 superimposed on the program schedule screen 1 1 5 . In the combo question 'Materials list prominent menu 4 5 6', there is a plural combo theme button 4 consisting of the respective themed names (for example, 5 Chinese characters from the beginning) of all the combo themes displayed in the combo themed list and a broadcasting ruler 4 5 7 displays a combination list 4 5 8 in the form of a list, and a scroll operation unit 4 5 9 that scrolls the display of the combination list 4 5 8. At the same time, a combination theme designating a combination theme of the program schedule 4 6 0 is provided. Before inserting the method, insert the button 4 6 1 and add the button 4 6 2 and close the combined theme list. The close button 4 6 6 of the explicit menu 4 5 6. The control section uses the mouse to perform each combination of questions Among the material buttons 4 5 7, for example, the combination theme button 4 5 7 A showing "Ugly Saturday" is touched, and then the front insert button 4 6 1 or the rear add button 4 6 2 is touched, and then the program is touched. In the schedule schedule screen 1 1 5 of the schedule schedule 460, for example, the video column of the shape of the person being displayed, such as "Experience the challenge of snowboarding in the entrance part" (item name). The composition of the program schedule into the schedule of 4 60 and edit the schedule of 4 600. (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this I)

* -ST This paper size applies to China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) -180- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 ___B7_____ 5. Description of the invention (17) 5 As shown in Figures (A) and (B), when the operator touches the front insert button 4 61, the control unit inserts the "Saturday's Ugly" 4 5 7 B into the "Experience Entrance Challenge Challenge Snowboard" The image column of the shape of the displayed person is before 46 0A (Figure 84 (A)). When you touch the post-add button 4 62, the "Saturday's Ugly" 4 5 7 B is added to "Experience Enrollment" Part of the challenge snowboard "is shown after the image of a person's shape is blocked by 460A (Figure 84 (B)). At this time, with the editing of the program schedule screen 115, the control section automatically corrects the respective sending time of the broadcast theme (including the combined theme) of the schedule table 60. In this way, the control unit can, under the designation of the operator, put the combined subject matter on the program schedule screen 1 1 5 into the program schedule sheet 4 60 and change the grouped combined subject matter from the undelivered state to the sent out Decision status. In the news program production and sending device 1, based on the edited program schedule 460, a combination theme incorporated into the program schedule 460 can be transmitted in a program manner. In addition, the program schedule terminal, the control unit of 3, may have a possibility of being sent out again from other programs from the plural broadcast theme displayed on the program schedule screen 1 15 of the program schedule 460. The line of the broadcast theme is touched by the operator with the mouse, and then the combination button 4 5 5 is clicked, and the touched broadcast. Theme is copied to the combined theme list read from the DB server 7. In this way, in the news program production and sending device 1, the broadcasting theme copied to the combined theme list can be sent based on the program schedule 460, and at the same time, the paper standard can be used in accordance with the Chinese national standard ( CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ~ 77 ---------------. 1T ------ line i {Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs β: Printed by A7, B7, and Industrial Cooperatives. V. Description of the invention (17te in the state of the broadcast server unit 22, based on the combination theme list registered in the DB server 7 and managed as a pending submission. (1 5-4) The actions and effects of the above structure can be recorded in the news program production and distribution device 1 and corresponding to the broadcast server recording area 2 2 A, the combined theme recording area 2 2 B, and The broadcast theme, combined theme, and universal theme in the universal theme collection area 2 2 C can be based on the combined theme list and the universal theme list in a state where the combined theme and universal theme are included in the broadcasting server section 22 And management. When the server unit 22 performs the collection of the combination theme, the control unit of the broadcast server management terminal 25 starts the application software for collection and starts the combination theme collection processing program shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 5, starting from step SP260. Proceed to step SP26 1 and at step SP261 display the program composition file FD read out from the DB server 7 and set the initial setting for recording. Then the control unit proceeds to step SP 2 6 2 The recording screen is displayed on the screen. If the operator touches the recording button of the recording screen with a mouse, the blank news and film theme display section is displayed on each line of the recording screen. After that, the control section proceeds to step SP 2 6 3 to determine whether it is just The control section judges that the recording of the combination theme is not finished when the recording screen is displayed on the screen, and determines that the recording of the combination theme is finished when the recording screen on the screen is closed. With this, the control section judges at step SP 2 6 3 If you get a negative result (also --- order ------ line, (Jingxian Pavilion please fill in the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -182- A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy One step s P 2 6 4 determines whether the combination theme button of the recording screen is touched. If the control does not obtain a negative result at this time, return to step SP 2 6 3 'until a positive result is obtained at step SP 2 6 4 and repeat from step to step. The loop from SP263 to step SP264 (SP264-SP263-SP264). After that, if the control unit obtains a positive result at step SP 2 6 4, it proceeds to the next step SP 2 6 5 and reads the combination theme list from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server controller terminal 9 and simultaneously reads the read combination. Various information on all the combined themes in the theme list is displayed in the news movie theme display section of the recording screen. Next, the control unit proceeds to step SP266, and judges whether there is a registration request for the combination theme from the operator (whether the input button on the recording screen is touched), and if a negative result is obtained, returns to step SP263, and then continues to step SP 2 6 6 Repeat the loop from step SP263 to step SP266 until a positive result is obtained (SP266 — SP263-SP264-SP265-SP266). After that, if the control part obtains an affirmative result at step SP26, then it proceeds to step SP26, and displays the combination theme input on the recording screen to highlight the highlighted menu. Secondly, the control unit proceeds to step SP 2 6 8 if a negative result is obtained, then proceeds to SP 2 6 9. When the operator enters the theme name of the combined theme and the slide rule, and presses it to close, it will get a positive result at SP 2 6 8 and close the highlight. Style menu, at the same time, the theme name and broadcast of the entered combination theme are ordered 11 ---- line- ^ ~ {Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) • 183- Α7 B? Printed by the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy The blank line at the top of the blank line of the news movie theme display. In this case, the control unit uses the mouse to touch the line displayed by the theme name of the unrecorded combination theme of the news movie theme display. 'If you touch the recording button at the same time', the recording selection highlight menu is displayed on the recording screen. After that, the control section displays the combination theme among the ν 1 button ~ R 4 button of the recording selection highlight menu by the operator's click. Confession When the source button is clicked and the execute button is touched at the same time, 'the combined subject matter of the object to be collected from the designated supply source is recorded in the combined subject matter recording area 2 2 of the broadcast server section 22, and the control section then enters Go to step SP 2 7 0 'If the operator touches the registration button on the recording screen with the mouse', all the combined themes displayed in the news movie theme display section are displayed in the form of the theme list through the broadcast server controller terminal 9 to D. Β servo 7 sends out and logs in. Next, the control unit proceeds to step SP 2 7 1 after closing the recording screen, returns to step SP 2 6 3 to determine whether it has just ended, and if a positive result is obtained, proceed to step S P 2 7 2 ends the combined theme collection processing program. Also, when the control unit of the broadcast server management terminal 25 collects the general theme collection of the broadcast server portion 22, it can be almost the same as the above combined theme collection processing program. The program can register a new universal theme in the universal theme list, and at the same time, the universal theme registered in the universal theme list can be included in the broadcasting server section 22 Use subject collection area 2 2 C. In addition, in this news program production and delivery device 1, on the console terminal 18, the combined subject registered in the combined subject list can be grouped into the program composition table, and the combined subject can be sent from Undecided status changed to Submit (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page)

This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) -184 · Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs «. A 7-B7 V. Description of the invention (Determined status. In this case, The control unit of the console terminal 18, when the operator designates a program composition table to be edited through a keyboard or the like, starts the program composition table editing processing program as shown in FIG. 86 from step SP 2 80 to step SP 281. In this step SP281, the editing application software is started, and the program configuration file FD, the combination theme list, or the general theme list read from the DB server 7 is displayed in the previous program composition table for initial setting. Next, the control section enters In step SP282, the program composition table screen is displayed on the screen, and at the same time, the program composition file FD is read from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server controller terminal 9, and the program composition C 0 selected by the operator is selected from the program material C 0 of the program composition file FD. The program data of the table is displayed. The control unit displays the selected program data C as a program composition table on the program registration screen. Then the control unit proceeds to the step. s P 2 8 3, determine whether it is instructed to end. In this way, if the control section obtains a negative result at step s P 2 8 3, then proceed to step SP 2 8 4 to determine whether the combination button is touched. Here the control section If a negative result is obtained at step SP 2 8 4, return to step SP283, and then repeat the process from step SP 2 8 3 to step s P 2 8 4 (SP 2 84-SP283) until a positive result is obtained at step SP284. — SP284). After that, if the control unit obtains a positive result at step SP 2 8 4 then proceed to step SP 2 8 5 from the DB server 7 through the broadcast server (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) ) The paper size of the edition is applicable to the Chinese national standard (CNS > A4 size (210X297mm) • 185 · Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 * ________B7 V. Description of the invention The combination theme list is displayed based on the read combination theme list, and the combined theme list is displayed in a superimposed menu on the program registration screen. Then, the control unit proceeds to step s P 2 8 6 to determine whether to combine theme one. The close button of the highlighted menu is touched. If a negative result is obtained, then proceed to step SP 2 87. The operator sequentially clicks the desired combination theme button with the mouse and the front insert button (or the back Add button), and the desired line of the program composition table, before (or after) the touched line: group the combination theme corresponding to the desired combination theme button that was touched, and you can The combination subject matter of the pending delivery status is changed to the status of the delivery decision. Next, the control unit proceeds to step s P 2 88. When the operator touches the registration button of the recording screen with the mouse, the program data C of the program composition table is used as the program composition file FD through the broadcast server controller terminal 9 to DB server 7 sends out and registers. In this way, the control unit repeats the loop (SP286-SP287-SP288-SP286) from step SP2 8 6 to step SP2 8 8 repeatedly until a positive result is obtained at step SP2 8 6, and thereafter, the step If the SP286 obtains a positive result, proceed to step SP 2 8 9 to close the combined theme list display highlight menu and close the program registration screen at the same time. Next, the control unit returns to step SP2 8 3 to determine whether it is instructed to end the program composition table, and if a positive result is obtained, it proceeds to step SP 2 9 0 to end the program composition table editing processing program. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order--line. 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 × 297 mm) -186- A7 A7 Shellfish Consumption of Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative cooperative printing 5. Description of the invention (and the control unit of the console terminal 18 edits the program composition table by using the unused general theme composition table that is registered in the general theme composition table. The procedure is almost the same. The general composition is incorporated into the program composition table and the program composition table is edited. The general composition which has an unsent state can be changed to the determined state. In this way, in the news program production and distribution device 1, The combination theme collection area 2 2 Β and the universal theme collection area 2 2 C, which are respectively recorded in the broadcasting server unit 2 2 and are registered in the combination theme list and the universal theme list, respectively. The subject matter can be easily changed to the state of the sending decision by incorporating a program composition table on the program registration screen through the console terminal 18. The news program production and delivery device 1 can record the combination theme collection area 2 2 Β which is recorded in the broadcasting server unit 22 and sends the combination theme that has not yet been registered in the combination theme list. The combination theme can be easily changed to the status of the delivery decision. The broadcasted subject matter of the transmission decision is copied from the program schedule on the program schedule screen to the combined subject list, and it is easy to change to the unsent state. In addition, the change is recorded in the unsent state of the broadcast server unit 22. When the combination subject matter and general purpose subject matter are determined to be sent, the change can be easily judged by registering the combination subject matter list and general subject matter list on the DB server 7, and it is easy to manage the recording and recording on the broadcast server. Department 2 2 combined subject matter and general purpose subject matter. In addition, the news program production and delivery device 1 is provided with a broadcasting subject matter recording area 2 2 A and a combined subject matter recording area. CNS} A4 size (210X297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this ) Order-line, -187- A7 B7 Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (with 2 2 B, the areas covered by the general theme are 2 2 C, and the corresponding areas are recorded in these areas. Broadcast themes, combined themes, and general-purpose themes. At the same time, create a combined theme list and a universal-themed list that display the collected combined themes and general-purpose themes, and register this in the DB server 7. The delivery device records and stores the combined subject matter and general purpose subject matter on the video tape, and can easily manage and store the combined subject matter and general purpose subject matter while being recorded in the broadcasting server unit 22. According to the above configuration, the broadcasting server Machine management terminal 25, creating and displaying a list of combined themes in the combination theme collection area 2 of the broadcast server section 22, and creating a list of combined themes collection area in the broadcast server section 22 2 0 C's universal theme list, and the combined theme list and universal theme list are recorded on the DB server 7 and on the console terminal 18 From the combination theme and / or universal theme displayed in the combination theme list and / or universal theme list read out by the DB server 7, the combination theme and / or universal theme specified by the operator is combined into the slave server. The program composition table read by the machine 7 is changed from the undelivered status to the sent-decision status, whereby the combined subject matter and / or the general-purpose subject matter of the sent-out status can be easily changed to the sent-decision status on the program composition table. Moreover, it can realize the program schedule based on the program composition table that is combined and edited based on the combination theme and / or universal theme, and it is easy to send the combination theme and / or universal theme that changes from the unsent state to the determined state. Program production and delivery device. (1 5 — 5) Other embodiments (please read the note on the back before filling this page) The size of the paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (2 丨 0X297 mm) -188- Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 printed by the Bureau Coconut Consumer Cooperative Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (1 gold in the above embodiment is a way for the control unit of the console terminal 18 to enter the broadcast theme, combination theme and general theme in the program composition list group. A description will be given of a case where the program composition table is edited, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to use the control section of the console terminal 18 to read out one of the broadcast themes registered in the program composition table from the DB server 7. A new program composition table is created by the broadcasting theme specified by the operator in the combination theme and the combined theme and universal theme specified by the operator among the combined theme and universal theme read from the DB server 7. In the embodiment described above, the console terminal 18 is used to highlight the combined menu 4 4 9 and the universal theme list to highlight the menu 4 4 9 and the universal theme list. The front insert button 451 and the rear add button 4 5 0 Combined explanation, but the present invention is not limited to this, except that the combined theme list prominent display menu 4 4 9 and the universal theme list prominent display menu are set on the combination theme list 4 5 1 and the front add button 4 5 In addition to 0, an overwrite button is added, and when the overwrite button is touched again, the composition of the combination overwriting theme and the general purpose theme that is touched later can also be 〇 Further to the above embodiment, For the schedule schedule terminal 39, the combination subject matter of the unsettled status is grouped into the schedule schedule screen 1 1 5 of the schedule schedule 4 60, and this is changed to the status of the delivery decision, and The program schedule screen 1 1 5 of the program schedule 4 60 will be described in the case where the broadcast theme is copied to the combined theme list, and the broadcast theme is changed from the status of the delivery decision to the status of the delivery uncertainty, but the present invention does not Not limited to this, the size of this paper is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ~ --------- <) ----- ---- si (I first read the note on the back Please fill in this page for further information) Member of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperatives A7 B7 V. Description of the invention 4 6 0 and change this to the status of the sending decision, and from the programming schedule screen 1 1 5 of the programming schedule 4 6 0 the broadcast theme is copied to the universal theme composition table to determine the broadcast theme from the delivery decision It is also possible to change the status to the unsent status. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, for the program schedule terminal 3 9 and the combination theme displayed on the screen, the highlighted menu 4 5 6 is provided with the insert button 4 6 1 and The case of the rear add button 4 6 2 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this, except that the pop-up menu 4 5 6 is set to the front insert button 4 6 1 and the rear add button 4 6 2 In addition, an overwrite button is added. When the overwrite button is touched, the composition of the subject matter of the program schedule 460, which is touched thereafter, may be overwritten. 16) Storage of news and film themes 16 — 1) Automatic recording of news and film themes in the production of news programs will be sent from the broadcasting server department as a section from the broadcasting server department to the subject matter, and will be sent to the reference room on this occasion The news program station terminal assigns a plurality of objects to be sent at the same time, and further designates the device to be sent. At the end of the one-shot, the repeated reading is sent out, and the reading is recorded in the video production and sending device. After the broadcast to the sky, count the recording media such as the various news film tapes from the news film theme. Operators control each new program to determine whether it becomes a custody image -------- line '-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this Page) This paper size is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 (210X297 gong) -190- Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, A7. ___B7 V. Description of the invention Also, among the news and film themes, only the news and film themes designated by the operator are designated as storage objects, and the record start time for storage is also specified. Thus, in the news program production and delivery device, the console terminal Pre-designated storage information (hereinafter referred to as storage information) is incorporated into the program configuration file and sent to the DB server. 'The storage information is registered in the DB server. In other words, the operator may be sent again. For news and film themed programs, or registration of all events that occur on that day as a constituent element, such as night or late night programs that may become historical data In this way, in the news program production and delivery device, each news movie subject matter constituting a night or late night program designated by the operator can be recorded on a recording medium, and the recording medium can be stored as historical data. In fact, the console terminal The storage information is designated by the control unit of the console terminal based on the program registration screen displayed on the screen. Parts corresponding to FIG. 9 are given the same symbols. As shown in FIG. When the operator touches the preset setting button 8 8 from the program registration screen 9 5 A displayed on the screen with the mouse, the pre-setting highlighting menu (not shown) is superimposed on the program registration screen 9 5 A. By doing this, the operator can specify whether the plural programs scheduled to be sent are the storage targets by setting a prominent menu in advance, or whether all the news and film themes of the programs designated as the storage targets are all the storage targets and further includes the designated recording start time. . Also, in the console terminal, you can specify the type of news movie subject matter (also That is to say, the theme of the broadcast --------- 1 ------ tT ------ f {Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -191-Printed on A7 by the Zhengong Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs _____B7 V. The invention description (the subject matter, combination subject matter, and general purpose subject matter) also made it pre-designated. After designating a program as a storage object, register a new news and film theme in the program composition table 95 of the program designated as a storage object, and the news and film theme that has been determined to be sent may be changed to a pending state. Here In this case, when the operator uses a mouse to change from the program composition table 95 to the sending of undecided news and film themes, if the operator does not touch the preparatory item button 4 8 0, he registers the touched news and film themes. As a storage object. In addition, when the operator uses the mouse to click to change the news and movie subject matter to be sent, and touches the NV theme button 4 8 1, the touched news subject is registered in the combined subject list and changed to Submit an undecided status and remove the subject matter of the news movie from the object of storage. ‘Among the news and film themes of the programs designated here as storage objects, when the operator designates a specific news and film content as the storage object, the operator uses the mouse to click the theme list button 4 8 2. With this, the control unit can select the tapped theme list button 4 8 2 to take out only the news and movie theme from the program composition table 9 5 and select the highlight list as a list of the theme list. The highlight menu 4 8 3 is superimposed and displayed on the program. Login screen 9 5 A »In this state, when the operator uses the mouse to touch the NV button 4 8 4 of the highlighted menu 4 8 3, the selected highlighted menu 4 8 3 is closed and the program registration screen is closed. 9 5 A superimposed display theme highlight menu. As shown in Figure 8-8, in the theme list, the prominent menu 4 8 5 is provided with a "item number / item name" column 4 8 7 or "composition number (read the precautions on the back before filling in the lettuce) page)

This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 OX2? 7mm) -192- Printed by the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 * B7 ___ V. Description of invention (ιά) / Composition name " 4 8 8 etc. In addition, a list 490 of subject matter formed by the "LIB" column 489 that can be designated as a storage target. In this case, when the operator touches the "LIB" column 489 corresponding to the news subject of the storage object with a mouse, the "LIB" column 489 corresponds to the touched "LIB" column 489 The mark displayed in a circle indicates that the news and film subject corresponding to the line is designated as the storage object. However, when the operator touched the “L I B” column with a circled mark 4 889 when the operator touched it again, the mark with the circled mark removed is no longer a storage object. In this way, the control unit designates the news and film material specified by the operator as the storage target from each news and film material of one program configuration table. In addition, whether each subject matter of the news movie is designated as the storage information of the protection object is incorporated into the program configuration file and registered in the DB server. In fact, the preservation of news and film themes is implemented through the management terminal of the broadcast server. The broadcast server management terminal determines whether or not a program that has been sent out is designated as a storage object every time the program is sent out based on the management information recorded on the DB server. With this, the broadcast server management terminal creates a consistent list from all or specific news and film themes of the program designated as the storage target when the program is designated as the storage target in accordance with, for example, the order in which they are sent. In this way, the broadcast server management terminal registers the created consistent list in the DB server. That is, in the consistent list, identification information such as an identification number or an identification character of a recording medium that is recorded after the subject matter of the news movie in the reference room is uniformly recorded is registered. This paper size is in accordance with China Goods Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) {Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Order-193- Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Industrial and Commercial Cooperatives 'Seal A7' _ B7 V. Explanation of the invention (In addition, when the broadcast server management terminal ends the broadcast of the day and reaches the pre-specified recording start time, it reads the consistent list from the DB server, and then uses the read consistent list to pass through the server. The machine management terminal sends a theme management instruction to the machine control unit. With this, the machine control unit controls the broadcasting server unit and the reference room based on the entered theme management instruction, and the broadcasting server unit will be registered in the plural list of the consistent news from the broadcasting server unit. The subject matter of the film is continuously read out in accordance with the registered order, and the news subject matter that is read out and recorded is recorded in the recording medium of the reference room. In addition, the broadcast server section will finish printing and use it in the recording. Consistent list of records. Multiple news and film subject records of storage objects can be stored on the recording medium. As shown in Figures 8 and 9, the format of each news film subject recorded on the recording medium is in the format of an information storage section that contains color bars or designated text information. The information storage section is then continuously stored and stored. The target is, for example, n news movie themes. The format of each news movie theme is the same as the previous movie department, time schedule (PROGRAM) department and the last movie department. The data volume (data collection) of the information storage unit is a predetermined designation. Here, the information storage unit of the consistent news and film theme stores the recognition information of the recording medium registered in the consistent list. , Even if the identification information recorded on the label attached to the recording medium (identification information that is the same as the identification information stored in the information storage unit) after a relatively long storage period cannot be identified, the operator can The paper size of the notebook is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) ----------) ------- IT ------ f (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) -194-Printed A7-B7 printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (The information storage unit recorded in the recording medium identifies the recording medium. (16 — 2) — Editing the consistency list However, the broadcast server management terminal automatically creates a consistency list based on the created consistency list based on the created consistency list after the respective programs designated as the consistency target have been sent. The control unit of the broadcasting server management terminal can edit the editing screen based on the consistent list displayed on the screen until the news and film subject matter is uniformed. In this case, the broadcasting server management terminal uses this control. The unit starts the application software for consistency, and displays the consistency list creation and editing screen on the screen. As shown in FIG. 90, the control unit displays the consistent list creation edit screen 4 9 5 on the screen. When the operator touches the consistent button 4 9 6 with the mouse, based on the touched The consistency button 4 9 6 is designated from the DB server through the broadcast server controller terminal as the storage target, and among the programs that have been sent out, the program composition table of the latest scheduled program at the scheduled time is read out as the program composition file. A consistent list corresponding to the read program composition table is read out. With this, the control unit only extracts news and movie themes from the program composition table read out by the DB server, and displays the various information of the retrieved news and movie themes on the corresponding "items" of the news and movie themes display unit 4 9 7 respectively. Number / item name "column 498," composition number / subject name "column 499," 0A ruler "column 500," receiving ruler "column 501, and" program name "column 502, etc., and will correspond to the program composition table This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297mm) ~ 195----------------- Order -------- Lacquer (Please read the back first Please note that this page is to be filled in again.) Member of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, M Consumer Cooperative, printed A7 · B7_ V. Invention Description (The program name of the program of 4 7 and the scheduled date and time of the program ’s delivery are displayed on the corresponding The program name column 5 0 3 and the submission date and time column 5 0 4. Not only that, the control unit displays a consistent list read from the .DB server and displays it in the same structure as the news and film theme display unit 4 9 7 described above. The list display section 5 0 5 will correspond to the The program name, scheduled delivery date, identification information of the recording media, and the number of themes of the news and movie themes registered in the consistent list are displayed in the corresponding consistent list name column 5 0 6. The column 5 0 7, the identification information column 5 0 8 and the subject number column 5 0 9 etc. are set on the right and lower sides of the news movie theme display section 4 9 7 and the right of the consistent list display section 5 5 respectively. There are scroll operation sections 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 and 5 1 3, and the scroll operation sections 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 and 5 1 3 respectively make the corresponding news subject display sections 4 9 7 and a consistent list. The display part 5 0 5 is scrolled in a specified direction so that the part that cannot be displayed on the screen is displayed. In this state of the control part, when the operator uses the mouse to touch the consistent list display part 5 0 5 to delete the object ( You can also touch multiple lines), and then touch the delete button 5 1 5 provided on the lower side of the consistent list display section 5 0 5 to delete the touched line from the consistent list. The subject matter of the news movie corresponding to the deleted line In addition, if the line of the news subject of the news subject display part 4 9 7 is touched (or multiple lines may be touched), the control part then touches the insert button 5 1 6 and then touches the same. The size of the paper list display part 5 0 5 is in accordance with the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ---------------- Order ----- -Line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -196- 馄 静 馄 3_Search Xue Yongshi but (Oblique Cat | Lion Department) Turned but tied 3 Likes > ^ Lion Department View but mistaken 4 9 T > To the ball cat to win the postman Di Xue Yongshi but C oblique broken l Lion but) Shang Stupid 5 ——_ A々 刈 U f * > §xtb® card search and seize her i Pei Li K: 6 ^ fs ^ >%-Lion's Bell Turns Over the Wrong Θ TmJ_ ± Li§ ^ —Miscellaneous® 5 2 5 oblique | Micro-cut 丨 _Left 4 『」 Luguan but search 5 O 5s ~ F®a3 Tough and difficult silver — 5 Μ βδ ® * I 1111¾ ^ 丨 ^ ^ u I ii ® iii I ^ i i- o ffl ^ iis * ^ ^ ϋ W ^ I Bacterial tenderness is difficult and thin fmj 丨 ο K 寐 * i 港 涵 如 两 杂 _Sight Li Nan: Hanging iu skimming wings and painting Pei §ΠΙΙΙΙΒ Hard 1 pair of males and males * I thin® Pei-scale chrysanthemum lion tender tender Whan I § ——m At 刈 at ϊϊ ^ mmti ——m A-tl β (1 e — 3) —— M- f 3 i 1- i Hanging Luohan Mg Wei shouts cat Li Shi · i ^ r—Frequency sincerity Miscellaneous—Ju I sound f3s dish hanging | Hedge-ί · I ^ > T ^ i iM δ · is, 丨 ^ ^ I Avm I 5 IH ^ Q 卬 沙 杂 — f ^ 丨 mAt When it seems to be e and foreign | Yong · I port over garlic i__ 落难§Harmonic production * 1 ¾¾¾ i ^ i .8- s 1 Η ——m At 刈 u ^ f fi i ® Seeing the private 0almjvlla ff Ai ^ ® a 3 03 then * 骤 定 丨 Θ 卬 Η19 ΙΜΙΜ / Ρ 却 * Ignoring thanks | Win 1 | Milk dirty marriage 5 3 2 * Disc i- i 1 I f 3 丨 ϊ- Λ ^-I § uw 1 S i ^ ww Thin and thin miscellaneous ffietr——mA-tsVJia Like > ^ Lion but _3 Section § 3 Miscellaneous. Fwnr ^ r ^ furs's 4i 1 fifwf ^ ozw ^ > a »r ^ MMOX W« ^ V ^ Y ^) (Qing frMna To outline) Ministry of Economic Central Standards Bureau employee consumer cooperative prints A7 _B7 V. Description of the invention (1 pot of media's identification message input field 5 3 4) There is also an implementation button 5 3 5 for the implementation of a new rule that specifies a consistent list and the cancellation of the consistent list Made of cancel button 536. When the control section displays the list creation prominent menu 5 3 2 on the screen, the operator inputs the name of the consistent list and the identification information of the recording medium through a switch or keyboard, and then clicks the execution button 5 with a mouse. If 3 5 is closed, the list creation highlight menu 5 3 2 is closed, and the consistent list display section 5 5 is blank. At the same time, the consistent list name column 5 0 6 and the identification information column 5 0 8 are respectively displayed through the list to create a prominent display. The name and identification information of the new consistent list entered in the menu. Moreover, when the operator touches the program theme button of the consistent list creation edit screen 4 9 5 based on the touched program theme button from the DB server through the broadcast server controller terminal, the designated program The composition table is read out as a program composition file. Thereby, the control section displays the news composition of the program composition list on the news composition display part 497 based on the program composition file read from the DB server as a list. In addition, when the operator touches the combination theme button 5 2 2 (or the general theme button 5 2 3) in place of the program theme button of the edit screen 4 9 5 in place of the consistent list, the operator selects the touched The combination theme button 5 2 2 (or the universal theme button 5 2 3) reads out the combination theme list (or the universal theme list) from the DB server through the broadcasting server controller terminal. As a result, the control section displays the combination theme (or general-purpose question material) displayed in the combination theme list (or general theme list) read from the DB server on the news movie theme display section 497. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) Α4 specification (210 ×: 297 mm) --------- > ------- ίτ ------ 槔. (Please read first Note on the back, please fill in this page again) 199- Printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Shellfish Consumer Cooperative, A7 * B7 V. Description of the invention (more than 1 case, the control department as the operator designates the above-mentioned consistent list according to various needs If you edit various operation buttons such as the cancel button 515 or the insert button 516, the content of the operation button that should be designated is selected from the plurality of news film themes (broadcasting theme, combined theme) displayed on the news movie theme display section 4 9 7 And general themes) new rules to create a consistent list and display it on the consistent list display section 505. At this time, the subject matter of news and movies not included in the broadcast server department is excluded from the consistent target. The control section, when the operator designates the registration button 5 2 5 or 5 2 6, sends the consistent list made by the new regulations to the DB server for registration through the broadcast server controller terminal. The broadcast server management terminal arrives in advance At the designated recording start time, each news and film subject designated as the storage target is automatically broadcast from the broadcasting server unit based on a consistent list (automatic production or new production) registered in the DB server. Record the broadcasted news and film subject matter on the recording medium. Here, the broadcast server management terminal can store the news and film subject matter at any time based on a consistent list created based on the new rules, regardless of the recording start time specified in advance. That is, as shown in FIG. 92, the control section of the broadcasting server management terminal newly creates a consistent list, and the operator then uses a mouse to touch the display section provided in the consistent list 5 0 5 If you press the execute button on the lower side of the screen, you can create the edit screen on the consistent list 4 9 5 and display the consistent implementation highlight menu 5 4 0. In this state, the control unit uses the mouse to click the consistent implementation highlight display. Menu button of menu 5 4 0 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ~ ----------) .-------, order ---- - Line i (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) ΑΊ B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. Description of the invention (5 2 1 according to the clicked execution button 5 4 1 through The server management terminal sends a theme management instruction to the machine control unit. In addition, the control unit displays a consistent menu 5 4 0 on the consistent list creation editing screen 4 9 5 and executes the button 5 4 1 If you touch the Cancel button 5 4 2 before you touch it, the execution of the recording is canceled. With this, the machine control unit controls the broadcast server unit and the data room according to the entered material management instruction. In this case, the broadcasting server unit once became the standby state. If the standby state ends after a specified time, it will be registered in the new rule. The plural news and movie themes in the list are automatically and continuously read out according to the registered order and sent to the data. Room (Library). The data room is pre-loaded with a medium, and the loaded recording medium is in a recordable state and waits (for example, when the recording medium is a video tape, the video tape is searched for the unrecorded head and waited). . In this state, when the broadcasting server automatically starts to play the news movie theme in the data room, it automatically records the entered news movie theme that has been entered. When the recording of news and film subjects ends, the broadcasting server department and the reference room respectively finish automatic broadcasting and recording. The control unit of the broadcasting server management terminal, after recording the consistent list created according to the new regulations, creates the consistent list and edits the screen 4 9 5 of the news movie theme display unit 4 9 7 and the consistent list display unit 5 05. The display of the "Consistentization" column is switched from "Unfinished" to "Completed" to notify the operator that the consistency has been completed. In addition, when the control unit executes the consistent operation, if the operator clicks the stop button of the consistent list creation edit screen 4 95, the continuous operation is suspended. --------- I ------- 1T ------ line (Please read the note on the back first and then fill out this page) The paper music scale is applicable to China National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -201-Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Invention description (1 deduction At this time, even if the news department has already recorded the subject matter of the news movie on the recording medium, it will also "Unfinished" is displayed in all the "Consistent" columns of the consistent list display section 505. In addition, after the control section is finished, the operator touches the consistent list with the mouse again to create the editing screen 4 9 5 When the button is executed, the print execution highlight menu is superimposed on the edit list creation screen 4 9 5. As shown in Fig. 93, the control unit touches the print execution highlight menu with the mouse by using the mouse. 5 4 5 When the execution button 5 4 6 is pressed, a consistent list created by the new regulations is printed based on the touched execution button 5 4 6. In addition, the control unit uses the mouse to touch the printing execution highlight menu 5 4 5 Cancel button 5 4 7 Cancels the printing of the consistent list 》 In this way, the control department of the broadcasting server management terminal can create a consistent list according to the new regulations, and at the same time, it can consistentize the corresponding news and image topics according to the consistent list produced by the new regulations. 1 6-4) The operations and effects are as described above. When the news program production and delivery device starts to transmit the program, the control unit of the broadcasting server management terminal 'starts a consistent list creation processing program as shown in FIG. 9 4 From step SP3 0 0 to step SP301, at step SP301, it is judged whether the sending of the program is over. If a negative result is obtained, then step s ρ 3 0 1 is repeated. Step SP 3 0 1 is affirmed. This paper is a standard for quick use in the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _2〇2_ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page.) Order A7 B7 Central Bureau of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs Employee Consumer Cooperatives Co., Ltd. 5. Description of the invention (2cib 1 1 up to the result 0 after that > The control department got a positive conclusion at step SP 3 0 1 If it is 1 |., Proceed to step SP 3 0 2 Determine if the news that has been sent out 1 Section I is designated as the storage object. If you get a negative result, go back to step 1 1 Step SP 3 0 1 and then step SP 3 0 2 Repeat step 1 from step SP 3 0 1 to step SP 3 0 2 until a positive result is obtained. It is a 1 1 circle (SP 3 0 2 — SP 3 0 1 — SP 3 0 2) 0 Attention picture 1 | After that, the control section ends the sending of the program designated as the custody of the program. Item 1 | Step SP 3 0 2 If you get a positive result, then proceed to step 1 1 SP 3 0 3 Judge the plural news film subject matter (NV subject matter) of the section g. Page 1 1 Are all accused of being the same? If you get a positive result, continue to 1 1 to step SP 3 0 4 to extract all the news in the section 100. Movie theme, make a consistent list of all news movie theme extracted from this 1 | In addition, the control department If I get a negative result at step SP 3 0 3, go to step 1 1 ISP 3 0 5 Among the multiple news and film themes of Jieju, only the specific news and film themes that have been designated as preservation objects in advance 1 1 are extracted from this News 1 1 Make a consistent list of film themes. Then the control unit goes to step f SP 3 0 6 and sends the completed —► run list as — run list file 1 I to the DB server through the broadcast server controller terminal and sends — * 11 1 I The registration list is registered in the DB server 0 1 1 In this way, the broadcasting server management terminal repeats the consistent list creation processing procedure until the end of the 1-day broadcast, and every time 1 I is designated as the section to be kept At the end of the delivery, the section giant's 1 1 I sent from the end was designated as the storage of news and film productions—consolidate the list and register this 1 1 1 on the DB server. 0 1 1 1 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 ^ (2) 0X297 mm) _ 2 03 A7 B7 _ V. Description of the invention (2 () l In addition, the control section of the news server production and delivery device 'broadcasting server management terminal starts the program If you send it, it will start to be consistent as shown in Figure 9 5 The program proceeds from step SP310 to step SP311. At step SP3 1 1 it is judged whether or not the recording start time specified in advance is reached. If a negative result is obtained, then step SP 3 1 1 is repeated at step SP 3 1 1 until Until a positive result is obtained in step SP 3 1 1. After that, if the control portion obtains an affirmative result in step SP 3 1 1, it proceeds to step SP 3 1 2 to determine whether a recording medium is installed in the data room. Here If the control part obtains a negative result at step SP 3 1 2, proceed to step SP 3 1 3 and create an edit screen on the screen's consistent list 4 9 5 in the message column 5 2 0. Error message. In addition, the control unit installs a recording medium in the data room in advance in step SP312, or installs a recording medium in the data room in the future. If a positive result is obtained, the process proceeds to step SP 3 1 4 ' Prepare the recording medium for recording (for example, if the recording medium is a video tape, roll the video tape to the beginning.) Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs (please read the back first) Please fill in this page again for the matters needing attention) Then, the control unit proceeds to step SP 3 1 5 to judge whether the recording preparation of the recording medium is finished (for example, when the recording medium is a video tape, it is judged whether the video tape has been rolled to the beginning), If a negative result is obtained, proceed to step SP 3 1 6 Create and edit the consistent list on the screen 4 9 5 Message bar 5 2 0 The error message "Record preparation error" is displayed (when the recording medium is a video tape, "Rewind error"). In addition, if the control unit obtains a positive result at step SP 3 1 5, it proceeds to step SP 3 1 7. According to a pre-made consistent list, the broadcasting server will be designated to use the Chinese standard (CNS) A4 for this paper size. Specifications (210X297mm) 204 dish printed dishes A7 * __B7_ by the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Ⅴ. Description of the invention (2 persons are the subject matter of the news movie kept in custody and will be broadcasted at the same time-consistent The subject matter of the news movie is recorded in the recording medium of the reference room. Then the control unit proceeds to step SP 3 1 8 to determine whether all the records of the subject matter of the news movie have been ended. If a negative result is obtained, proceed to step SP 3 19, Create the edit screen 4 9 5 on the screen's consistent list. The message block 2 0 displays the error message "An error occurred during recording." In addition, if the control unit obtains a positive result at step SP 3 1 8 ', proceed to step S. Ρ 3 2 0, stop the playback of the broadcasting server section 'and stop recording in the data room. Then, the control section proceeds to step S ρ 3 2 1 and will display the representative recording% end The recording end information of the consistent list in which the news movie subject matter is registered is sent to the D Β server through the broadcasting server controller terminal, and the information in the consistent list of the recording end of the D Β server is registered. Next, the control unit proceeds to step SP 3 2 2 deletes the error message displayed on the message list 5 2 0 of the consistent list creation and editing screen 4 9 5 ', and then proceeds to step SP 3 2 3 to determine whether the recording of the news subject has ended normally. If a positive result is obtained, Continue to step SP 3 2 4 to print the consistent list used for recording. In addition, if the control unit obtains a negative result at step SP 3 2 3, proceed to step SP 3 2 5 to print and display the news movie theme. A list of errors generated during recording. In this way, the control unit of the broadcast server management terminal repeats a consistent process every time a day of the broadcast ends. In this case, in the news program production and delivery device, the console Programs of the storage target and news videos of the storage target designated by the operator in advance at the terminal ---------) ------, tr ------ line (read first, read back) Please fill in this page again if you need to pay attention to this page) This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -205- Printed by A7, B7 of the Bayer Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy ¾ Recording information is generated from the film subject and recording start time. This is registered in the DB server in advance, and the storage server reads out the storage target program from the storage server management terminal based on the storage information read from the DB server. The subject's news and film themes are automatically made into a consistent list, and at the time of recording, according to the consistent list, the news server and the subject of the custody are automatically played back continuously from the broadcasting server department. The list is printed automatically, so that it is not necessary to use the equipment such as an editing machine or word processor when recording the news and subject matter of the storage target as before, and it is not necessary to perform complicated operations that span a relatively long period of time. The subject matter of the news and film being sent or the daily events and other events as daily historical information It is easy to record in a relatively short time and it is easy to make a consistent list and print it. In addition, in the news program production and transmission device, the identification information of the recording medium is registered in the consistent list, and the identification information is recorded with the corresponding recording medium at the same time as the subject matter of the news movie, so that the operator can easily identify the recording medium. Furthermore, in the news program production and delivery device, the broadcast server management terminal combines the combined theme displayed in the combined theme list and the universal theme displayed in the universal theme list to edit the consistent list, or New consistent lists can be created from broadcast themes, combined themes, and / or universal themes that are separately displayed on the program composition list, combined theme list, or general theme list. It can be implemented with historical data. It can also be started from the time of natural disasters such as earthquakes to reconstruction or a major event from occurrence to resolution. Ί ~ II Order 1. ^ Ί (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this book Page) This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -206- Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Α7 Β7 V. Description of the invention (consolidation of related news and film subjects spanning a long period of time Records are kept for historical data. According to the above configuration, the console terminal can be operated from the previous operation. The storage information is generated by the designated storage target ’s program, the subject ’s news and film subject matter, and the recording start time, etc., and this is registered in the DB server in advance, and it is read from the DB server by the broadcast server management terminal. The storage information automatically creates a consistent list from the news object of the storage object of the program that is being sent to the storage end, and at the same time, automatically plays the news object of the storage object from the broadcast server based on the consistent list at the start time of storage, This consistency is recorded in the recording medium, so that it can be used for the preservation of news and film themes that are likely to be sent again or certain events such as news events that may become historical materials. The subject matter of the news movie is recorded in a relatively short period of time, and it is easy to record the program production and delivery device for the subject matter of the storage target that has been sent out. (16-5) Other embodiments are the same as the above embodiment, although they are directed to the end of the day. Then, at the pre-designated recording start time, The subject matter of the subject news movie is described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of each week, or at the specified time during other intervals, such as after the end of each news program, or The consistent implementation of the prominent menu 5 4 0 designated execution button 5 4 1 can be started at any time to record the news subject of the storage object. This paper size is applicable to the Chinese national kneading car (CNS) Α4 size (210 × 297 mm)- --------) .------ Order ------ line-V (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -207-

(Go to Article Central Bureau of Standards of the Ministry of Economic Affairs—Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives Print A7 · ___ B7 V. Invention Description (2) Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining the production of the program composition table. Figure 9 is a screen for explaining the schedule of programs Figure 10 is a flowchart showing the program creation procedure. Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining the setting of punctual advertisements based on the program composition table. Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining the setting of punctual advertisements according to the program composition table. Figure 13 is a diagram for explaining the setting of punctual advertisement according to the program composition table. Figure 14 is a flowchart showing the setting procedure of punctual advertisements. Figure 15 is a diagram for explaining the punctual advertisement according to the program composition table. Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining the setting of the confirmation frame according to the program composition table. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting procedure of the confirmation frame. Fig. 18 is a flowchart showing the setting procedure of the confirmation frame. Fig. 19 It is a diagram showing the structure of a console terminal. Fig. 20 is a diagram for explaining the creation of a program composition table. Fig. 21 is a diagram for explaining the creation of a program composition table. Fig. 22 is a diagram showing a program composition table. Flowchart of the input / change procedure. Figures 2 and 3 are diagrams for explaining the entry or change of items in the program composition table. Figures 2 and 4 are manual shots showing each "composition" of the program composition table. Figure of the display status of the operation or automatic shooting operation. This paper size uses the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _21〇_ '-.......--. ..... — ϋ n n- Hr —ml ^ -rejn ^ i 1 ^ 1 Mi (Jing first read the precautions on the back and then fill out this page) Printed by the Staff Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A diagram showing the display status of the manual shooting operation or the automatic shooting operation of each "composition" of the program schedule. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure for determining and canceling the composition time. Fig. 2 7 It is a diagram showing an example of a program composition table displayed on a report terminal. Figs. 2 to 8 are diagrams showing a display example of a highlight menu. Fig. 29 is a diagram showing a state in which a highlight menu is displayed on a program composition list. Figure 30 shows the project time and structure of the program composition table Figure 31 shows the status of the program. Figure 31 shows the program composition table after the explicit menu is closed when the composition time is determined. Figure 32 shows the program schedule that determines the composition of the time. Figure 3 3 shows an example of the program composition table displayed on the reporting terminal. Figure 3 4 shows the program composition table after the explicit menu is closed at the start time of determining the composition. Figure 3 5 shows the confirmation A part of the schedule of the program schedule that constitutes the start time. Figures 3 and 6 are flowcharts showing the procedure for determining the start time. Figures 37 and 7 show the status of the highlighted menu superimposed on the program composition table. Figure {Please read the notes on the back ^ before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) -211-

Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards and Quarantine Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs of the Bayer Consumer Cooperatives A7 * B7 V. Description of the Invention (2l) l Figure 6 8 shows the display form of the status screen of the recording operation. Figure 6 9 shows the production of the recorded program Flow chart of the device structure. Figure 70 is a diagram showing the sending screen of the broadcasting server management terminal. Figure 71 is a picture showing the sending screen of the broadcasting server management terminal. Figure 72 is a region showing the sending operation. The diagram of the display form of the list screen "Fig. 7 is a diagram showing the display form of the status screen of the submit operation. Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing the structure of the program production device that is submitted. Fig. 7 5 shows the submit operation. This is a diagram showing the display form of the theme delivery list screen. Figure 76 is a block diagram showing the collection of news and video themes. Figure 7 and 7 show the collection screen displayed on the screen of the management terminal of the broadcast server during the collection of the combined theme. Figures 7 and 8 show the combination material input highlighted menu displayed on the screen during the collection of the combination theme. Figures 7 and 9 show the program registration screen displayed on the screen of the console terminal during editing of the program composition table. This & Zhang scale is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Λ4 specification (210X297 mm) ~ • Z14 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

-, 1T 竦. A7 B7 Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economy Figure 8 shows the program registration screen with the highlighted menu displayed. Figure 8 2 shows the program registration screen where the program composition table has been edited. Figure 83 shows the program with the combination theme highlighted. Diagram of the schedule screen. Figures 8 and 4 are diagrams for explaining the composition of the program schedule to the combination of the theme of the program schedule screen. Figures 8 and 5 are flowcharts showing the processing procedures of the combination theme recording. Figures 8 and 6 are flowcharts showing the editing procedure of the program composition table. Figures 8 and 7 are diagrams for explaining the pre-setting of the preservation of news and film themes. Figures 8 and 8 are diagrams showing the highlight menu of the theme list. 8 9 is a diagram showing a video format of a plurality of news and film materials recorded in a consistent recording medium. FIG. 90 is a consistent row of editors used in a consistent list. The diagram of the table making editing screen. Fig. 91 is a diagram showing the list making highlight menu. Fig. 92 is a diagram showing the consistent implementation of the highlight menu. Fig. 93 is a diagram showing the printing implementation of the highlight menu. Figure 9 shows a flowchart of a consistent list creation process. Figure 95 shows a flowchart of a consistent list process. Figure 96 shows a compilation of a list according to one of the other embodiments. ------ ,. J ------ IT ------ f (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210X297 mm) A7 B7 V. Invention description (2 coherent list used to highlight the list, the style of the menu. Symbol description 1 News program production and delivery device 2 News program production support department 3 News subject production management department 4 Main control room 5 Send out machine control department 6 Branch / branch office / club terminal 7 Database server

8 LAN 9 On-Air server control terminal 10 Service reservation input terminal 11 Interview management terminal 11A Equipment reservation terminal 1 1 B Interview reservation terminal 1 1 C Interview team member terminal Central Ministry of Standards, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Consumption Cooperative Print (Please (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 12 Router 13 Dedicated Line _

14 TA 15 Reporter terminal 16 Public telephone line 18 Desk terminal 18A1 ~ 18An Work station The paper deficit is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -216- A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (2l) l · 20 Linear editing machine 21, 21A, 2B VTR 22 Broadcast server 2 2 A Broadcast server 2 2 B The first electric head (Credit well-known news agency name) is written in the device and printed by the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives 2 2 C 2nd electric head writing device 2 3 Servo control terminal 2 4 Machine control section 2 5 Broadcasting server management terminal 2 6 Non-linear editing machine 3 0 Switcher / mixer 3 1 Send out machine control terminal 3 2 Device Control section 3 3 Clock 3 4 Sub-inside input terminal 3 5 VTR 3 6 CG editing section 3 7 Sending machine 3 8 Camera 3 9 Big schedule schedule terminal 4 0 Gateway 5 1 Production department 5 2 Advertising library 5 3 Program Library --------- I ------- 1T ------ T (Please read the precautions on the back first (Write this page) This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) -217- V. Description of invention (2 persons A7 B7 Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standards Bureau Offset Consumer Cooperative Cooperative Print 5 5 Starter 5 6 Advertisement delivery device 6 0 Program table 6 0 A editing screen 6 0 B Display section 6 1 ， 5 0 3 Section name column 6 2 Program start time column 6 3 Program end time column 6 4 Play time column 6 5 Program Number column 6 6 Operation mode column 6 7 Control panel column 6 8 Region / Internet column 6 9 Factory status j Fine column 7 0 CG column 7 1 Factory end message J column 7 2 Setting buttons 8 0 A, 8 0 B… … Menu 8 1 Schedule selection button 8 2 Interview schedule button 8 3 Interview team button 8 4 Original button 8 5 Program to commit button 8 6 Search button I .--------,) ----- -Order ------ ^ — 1 (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page K) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) Economy Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards Shellfish Consumer Cooperative A7 'B7 V. Description of the invention (21¾ 87 Program registration button 88 Pre-set button 9 0 Function key button 9 1, 9 2 Message bar 95, 145, 155, 438, 454 Program composition table 9 5 A screen 9 5 B Display 9 6 Item name field 9 7 Item number field 9 8 "Start time / time" field 9 9 '9 9 B Form time field 1 0 0, 4 6 0 A Image field 101 "Key Column 102 Effect Column 103 Sound Column 10 4 Μ IX Column 105 Subtitle Column 106, 15 9 Confirmation Time Notification Column 107 Setting Button 1 0 7 Α Interview Item Button 1 0 7 B CM—Q Designation Button 108 Function Key Button 110 Interview Item Pop-up The paper ruler is used in China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) _-I!-, II..:: »» ^ 1 'i.. I nn X- j!-I—-—i-e-¾ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs ^ A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (2 public 1 1 0 A" 1. Spring in mom's ranch j 111 Composition pattern highlight menu 1 1 1 A 「3.Camera + NV」 1 1 2 B 「3 .Spring of Mom's Ranch "I 1 2 C" 3.Advertisement schedule video segment "II 2D" 4.Advertisement schedule video segment "115 Program schedule screen 120 CM-Q prominent menu 1 2 1 A ~ 1 2 1 D Time setting button 122 Assignment button 123 Cancel button 1 2 4, 3 0 2, 3 1 3 Cancel button 1 2 6 A "Composition 2" 1 2 6 B "Composition 1" 1 2 6 C Punctual advertisement 130 Confirm frame 130A ~ 130D Confirm frame with 131 remaining time button 132 Confirm frame highlight menu 1 3 3 A "OK NET" 1 3 3 B "Item 1" 1 3 3 C "Item 2" 1 3 3 D "Advertisement" 134 OK Frame program This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297mm) _ _ (Please read the precautions on the back of It before filling out this page), -ιτ printed by the Consumer Standards Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs B7 V. Description of the invention (21¾ 135 Confirm the frame bar 1 3 6 Remaining time 1 4 〇 A "Headline 1" 141 Lock button 146 Confirm DUR button 14 7 Highlight menu 148 Assign button 149 Release button 150 'Cancel button 15 1 Time display Window 152 time adjustment button 157 OK start No. 158, 460 Program schedule 159 Confirmation time notification column 160 Symbol (rectangle and diamond-shaped framed number here) 161 OK start button 162 Setting highlight menu 163, 452, 463 Close button 66 ~ 170, 175 And 176 theme mark 1 7 1, 1 7 2 rectangular red frame 5 173 NEXT designated button 174 delete button 17 7 list of items --------- · 丨, -------- Order ----- -Later--I (Please read the notes on the back before filling in this page.) This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210X297 mm) -221-Printed by the Shellfish Consumer Cooperative of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (21¾ 1 7 8, 1 7 9 Scroll button 180 to last button 181 instead of button 1 8 2, 5 1 8 Move button 183, 519 Undo button 1 8 8 A Program "Evening "News" 189 Preview preview button 190 Preview preview button 192 'Pre-show highlight menu 193 Item number column 194 Start time column 196, 301, 312, 535, 541, 546' 553 Execute button 19 7 Cancel button 220 Initial setting screen 221 Schedule Button 222 scheduled interview button 22 3 Interview crew button 224 Original button 228 Preset button 230 Original list 231 Original list of interviews 2 3 1 A Item Block 2 3 2 On-Air Original List — II___I _ 1 ·) / __ I II _ T nnnnn AVT. ' I -e-¾ (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS > A4 size (210X297 mm) -222- A7 B7 Buyers and Consumer Cooperatives, Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Invention Description (22b 2 3 4 "Interview item S / Title" 2 3 5 "Reading time j 2 3 6" Interview manuscript IDJ 2 3 7 "Item number / Broadcasting item 2 3 8" "Project time j 2 3 9 「Reading time j 2 4 0」 0 A Original IDJ 2 4 5 Original production screen 246 '2 47, 248, 249, 25 0, 303 Display column 251 Original input box 2 5 1 A factory F 1 J key 2 5 1 B Γ F 2 J key 2 5 1 C factory F 4 · J key 2 5 1 D factory F 5 J key 2 5 1 E Γ F 7 J key 2 5 1 F factory F 8 J key 2 5 2. Theme mark input basis 2 5 3 Highlight menu 2 5 4 Composition number 2 5 5 Completion time 2 5 6% 2 5 7 Theme mark 2 5 8 Original input field 2 5 9 Message • ma This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) ---------- ) .------ Order ------ One Sniff / --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) -223- V. Description of Invention (22¾ A7 B7 Staff of Central Standards Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by consumer cooperatives 2 6 0 Theme mark input field 2 6 1 Original input field 2 6 3 Number of characters field 2 6 4 Read time field 2 6 5 Login button 2 6 6 Print button 2 6 7 Horizontal designation button 2 6 8 Zhuyin Small button 2 6 9 All information buttons 2 7 0 Recording screen 2 7 0 Μ 3 0 8 '5 2 0 Message bar 2 7 1 Recording screen 2 7 2 Submit button 2 7 3 > 4 9 6 —Persistent button 2 7 4 Theme management button 2 7 5 Advance setting button 2 7 6 Program display section 2 7 7 Scheduled date display section 2 7 8 Program theme buttons 2 7 9 4 4 8, 4 4 8 A, 4 5 7, 7, 5 7 A 2 Combination theme buttons 2 8 0 Universal theme buttons 2 8 1, 4 3 1, 4 9 7 News image theme display section 282, 487, 498 "item number / item name j column (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Customized This paper size applies the Chinese national standard {CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -224- A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (22 ^ 283, 488, 499 "Composition number / theme name" column 284, 500 "0 eight feet" column 2 8 5 "paint" column 286, 501 "collection rule" column Printing by industrial and consumer cooperatives 2 8 7 Factory progress "column 2 8 8 wide 1 ^ subj column 2 8 9 factory-consistent" column 2 9 0 factory ID number "column 2 9 1 record button 2 9 2 status display section 2 9 3 ~ 2 9 9 Status display 3 0 0 Highlight supply source selection table 3 0 4 Time code column 3 0 5 '4 3 7 0 A ruler column 3 0 6, 4 3 6 Theme name column 3 0 7 Stamp Box 3 0 9 Stop button 3 1 0 Tap the button 3 1 1 to stop recording the highlighted window 3 2 1 screen 3 2 7 display bar 3 2 5 title display bar 3 2 3 time code bar 3 2 4 0 A ruler bar ---------). ------ 1T ------ Ψ (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) This paper size adopts China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210X297 mm) -225- V. Description of the invention (22¾ A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 3 2 6 Stamp 3 2 8 Stop button 1 (3 3 0 Send screen 3 3 0 A Message bar 3 3 1 Record button 3 3 2 Send button 3 3 3 — Push button 3 3 4 Theme management button 3 3 5 'Event, setting button 3 3 6 section giant button 3 4 1 item giant display bar 3 4 1 D factory picture j display bar 3 4 1 F Γ progress ” Display bar 3 4 2 Ground send button 3 4 3 3 4 9 Status screen 3 6 0 Area send table screen 3 6 1 Start button 3 6 2 End button 3 6 3 Send fun m 3 6 3 A Γ No. j Display column 3 6 3 B Γ Submit object j Display column 3 6 3 C Γ Subject name j Display booth 3 3 3 D Γ 〇A ruler ”Display column 3 6 4 E Factory I _D number j Display & M rotten-- -------. 丨 ------- 1T ------ 嘷 ί (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) Α4 Specifications (2 丨 〇297297mm) -226- V. Description of the invention (22 ^ A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Central Standards Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 3 7 0 Highlighted object selection table 3 8 5 Time code column 3 8 6 0 A Ruler bar 3 8 7 Title display shed bar 3 8 8 Stamp frame 3 8 9 Message bar 3 9 0 Play button 3 9 1 Stop (ST 〇P) button 3 9 2 End (END) button 4 0 0 Theme Sending and sending list screen 4 0 1 Start button 4 0 2 End button 4 0 3 Theme send display column 4 0 3 A Factory edit c & Μ j Display column 4 0 3 B Γ Send target j Display column 4 0 3 C Factory title Material name j Display column 4 0 3 D Factory 0 A Ruler j Display column 4 0 3 E Factory ID No. J Display column 4 1 0 Subject delivery object— · List 4 1 1 Delivery object—List 4 3 0 Selector 4 3 2 Input button 4 3 5 Combination theme input prominent menu 4 3 8 A 、 4 5 4 A Section 100 login screen (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The paper size for this edition applies to China country # 准 （CNS） A4 specifications (2 丨 〇X25 > 7mm) -227- A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (22 ^ 439, 481 NV theme button 440 theme selection prominent menu 441, 455 combination button 4 4 2 universal button 443 broadcast theme Button 4 4 4 Yesterday button 4 4 5 Today button 446 Broadcasting day designation department 4 4 9 '456 Combination highlighting theme list menu 450, 462 Additional button Printed by the Ministry of Economic Affairs Central Standard Bureau Staff Consumer Cooperatives 4 5 1, 4, 6 1 Item U Insert button 4 5 7 B Factory Week-I— Ugly j 4 5 8 Combination list menu 4 5 9 Scroll operation section 4 8 0 No item button prepared 4 8 2 Theme list button 4 8 3 Select highlight menu 4 8 4 NV button 4 8 5 Theme — browse highlight menu 4 8 9 Factory LIB ”column 4 9 0 Theme list 4 9 5 — · Performed form creation editor 5 0 2 Factory section name J Column 5 0 4 Column when sending out | _ ^ --------) ----- 1T ------ 崠! /-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (2 丨 OX297 mm) -228- V. Description of the invention (2 points A7 B7 Central Standard of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau—Industrial and Consumer Cooperatives Co., Ltd. 5 0 5 —. Guanhua form display section 5 0 6 — 'Guanhua form name to avoid rotten 5 0 7 submission date column 5 0 8 identification information column 5 0 9 subject number column 5 1 1, '5 1 2, 5 1 3 Scroll operation unit 5 1 5 Delete button 5 1 6 Insert button 5 1 7 Add button 5 2 3 Universal button 5 2 5, .5 2 6 Login button 5 3 0 List creation button 5 3 2 List creation highlight menu 5 3 3 Name entry field 5 3 4 Identification information entry field 5 3 6, .5 4 2, 5 4 7 Cancel button 5 4 0 — * Implementation of the highlighted menu 5 4 5 Printing implementation Highlighted menu 5 5 0 — Persistence list — Overview Highlighted menu 5 5 1 — Persistence section giant list column 5 5 2 —. Persistence new list column D 1 Instruction data D 2 Play instruction data D 3 Subject matter transmission data n--n ------ ϋ ----- II 1 / —— (—— mil— TI— —1 innn 1-'*-V * {Please read the note i on the back before filling this page) The paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standards (CNS) 规 4 rules < grid (210X297 mm) -229- A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (22 > Economy Printed by the Central Bureau of Standards, Shellfish Consumer Cooperatives, C1 Sectional giant schedule schedule, Sectional information S Μ 1 Υ TR Control signal S Μ 2 First electrical head writing device control signal S Μ 3 Broadcasting server control signal S Μ 4 Broadcasting servo control signal S Μ 5 Second electrical head writing device control signal S Μ 6 Broadcasting server control signal S Μ 7 Second electrical head writing device control signal SV 0 Video / sound data SV 2 Video / sound Data P 1, P 2, P 3 Text data SV 1, SV 2 SV 4 Video / audio data DS 2 Machine control data CL 1 No. 1 electric head data CL 2 No. 2 electrical head information CL 3 No. 3 electrical head information SS 1 Operation signal SG 1 Control signal R 1 R 4 Telephone total (read the precautions on the reverse side before filling out this page) The paper size of this paper applies Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 size (210X297 mm) -230-

Claims (1)

、 Scope of patent application ____11IIIII E · I! (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) ~ 87 1 0373 Amendment to the Chinese Patent Application for Patent Application No. 87 1 0373. Amendment 1. A program production and delivery device is used to produce a plurality of themes that constitute a festival and a purpose. At the same time, each theme is sequentially ordered in accordance with the program schedule of the displayed program. Fir ··. · — 1 " Program production support means for simultaneously producing production information consisting of production schedules of the above-mentioned subject matter and display program composition information of each component of the program and program composition information produced by the program production support means Schedule, according to the above-mentioned program schedule, send out the sending machine control means of the above question f, and record the subject matter sent from the sending machine control means, edit the recorded subject matter production management means at the same time, and memorize other than the subject matter Means of memorizing data, and--1. Consumers of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The fee cooperative prints and continues the above-mentioned program production support means, the above-mentioned delivery machine control means, the above-mentioned theme production management means, and the above-mentioned memory means; and through the above-mentioned network means, the continuation: management means that manages all program delivery, and The production schedule information for producing the production information is sent to the external support means of the above-mentioned program production support means. 2. If the program production and delivery device of item 1 of the scope of patent application, the above-mentioned program production support means, and then an interview schedule form showing acquisition interviews for each subject. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 、 Scope of patent application ____11IIIII E · I! (Please read the phonetic on the back? Matters before filling out this page) ~ 87 1 0373 Amendment to the Chinese Patent Application for Patent Application No. 87 1 0373. Amendment 1. A program production and delivery device is used to produce a plurality of themes that constitute a festival and a purpose. At the same time, each theme is sequentially ordered in accordance with the program schedule of the displayed program. Fir ··. · — 1 " Program production support means for simultaneously producing production information consisting of production schedules of the above-mentioned subject matter and display program composition information of each component of the program and program composition information produced by the program production support means Schedule, according to the above-mentioned program schedule, send out the sending machine control means of the above question f, and record the subject matter sent from the sending machine control means, edit the recorded subject matter production management means at the same time, and memorize other than the subject matter Means of memorizing data, and--1. Consumers of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs The fee cooperative prints and continues the above-mentioned program production support means, the above-mentioned delivery machine control means, the above-mentioned theme production management means, and the above-mentioned memory means; and through the above-mentioned network means, the continuation: management means that manages all program delivery, and The production schedule information for producing the production information is sent to the external support means of the above-mentioned program production support means. 2. If the program production and delivery device of item 1 of the scope of patent application, the above-mentioned program production support means, and then an interview schedule form showing acquisition interviews for each subject. This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) A8B8C8D8 VI. Patent application scope 3. For the program production and delivery device of the first patent application scope, among which, the above-mentioned program production support means 'and' Create a schedule to show the schedules of the team members who have obtained each subject. 4 · If the program production and delivery device of item 1 of the scope of patent application, among which, the above-mentioned program production support means, and then the instant broadcast manuscript for broadcasting in the program. 5. If the program production and delivery device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the above-mentioned subject matter system is used as a management means, and further provided with a recording means for recording the subject matter according to the above-mentioned program and recording the subject matter on a video tape or a cassette. 6. If the program production and delivery device of item 1 of the scope of patent application, among which is the above-mentioned network means, it is further followed by the computer drawing means for applying computer drawing to the above subject matter. -----------.- ^ -------- Order, (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -2-